ICP-CC488
Installation Guide
ICP-CC488 Control
EN Panel
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | Contents
EN | 3
Master Code Functions ................................27
5.2
5.2.1
Arm or Disarm Both Areas at the Same
Time................................................................27
Contents
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
Introduction......................................................8
ICP-CC488 Features .......................................8
Quick Start........................................................9
Set the Date and Time....................................9
ICP-CC488 Zone Defaults .............................9
Zone Types.................................................... 10
5.2.2
5.2.3
Changing and Deleting User Codes...........27
Changing and Deleting Remote Radio User
Codes..............................................................28
Changing Domestic Phone Numbers.........28
Change Telco Arm/Disarm Sequence.......29
Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones.......................30
Turning Outputs On/Off .............................30
Setting the Date and Time...........................31
Walk Test Mode............................................31
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.2.7
5.2.8
5.2.9
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
Codepad Indicators...................................... 10
ICP-CP508W Eight Zone LED Codepad . 10
ICP-CP508LW Eight Zone LCD Codepad11
ICP-CP500PW Master Partitioned LED
Codepad......................................................... 12
5.2.10 Event Non-volatile Memory Recall Mode 31
5.3
5.3.1
User Code Functions....................................32
Arm or Disarm Both Areas at the Same
Time................................................................32
2.4
ICP-CP516 Sixteen Zone Codepads.......... 13
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
System Operations........................................ 14
Arming the System in AWAY Mode ........ 14
Disarming the System from AWAY Mode14
Arming the System in STAY Mode 1 ....... 14
Disarming the System from STAY Mode 115
Arming The System in STAY Mode 2...... 15
Disarming the System from STAY Mode 216
Codepad Duress Alarm ............................... 16
Codepad Panic Alarm.................................. 16
Codepad Fire Alarm .................................... 17
Codepad Medical Alarm............................. 17
Isolating Zones.............................................. 17
5.4
Hold-Down Functions..................................32
Arm the System in AWAY Mode ..............32
Arm the System in STAY Mode 1 .............32
Arm the System in STAY Mode 2 .............32
Horn Speaker Test........................................33
Bell Test..........................................................33
Strobe Test.....................................................33
Turning Day Alarm On and Off.................33
Fault Analysis Mode.....................................33
Initiate a Modem Call ..................................33
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.4.6
5.4.7
5.4.8
5.4.9
5.4.10 Reset Latching Outputs................................33
5.4.11 Change the Codepad Buzzer Tone ............33
5.4.12 Send Test Report...........................................34
3.11.1 Standard Isolating......................................... 17
3.11.2 Code to Isolate.............................................. 17
3.12
3.13
6.0
Remote Arming by Telephone ...................34
Fault Analysis Mode..................................... 18
Fault Descriptions......................................... 18
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.4.1
Programming.................................................34
Programming with the Remote Codepad..34
Programming with the Programming Key 35
Programming Option Bits............................36
Installer’s Programming Commands..........36
Command 959 – Test the Programming Key
.........................................................................36
Command 960 – Exit from Installer's
Programming Mode......................................37
Command 961 – Reset the Control Panel to
Factory Default Settings ...............................37
Command 962 – Copy the Control Panel
Memory to the Programming Key .............37
Command 963 – Copy the Programming
Key to the Control Panel .............................37
.4.0 Remote Radio Transmitter Operations.......... 20
4.1
Indications from Remote Radio Transmitter
Operations..................................................... 21
Remote Radio User Code Priority Levels. 21
Changing or Deleting Remote Radio User
Codes.............................................................. 21
4.2
4.3
7.4.2
7.4.3
7.4.4
7.4.5
7.4.6
7.4.7
7.4.8
5.0
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
System Functions.......................................... 22
Installer Code Functions.............................. 22
Add or Delete RF Wireless Devices .......... 22
Set the Number of Days until the First Test
Report............................................................. 23
Change Domestic Phone Numbers............ 23
Change Telco Arm/Disarm Sequence....... 24
Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones...................... 25
Satellite Siren Service Mode ....................... 25
Turning Telephone Monitor Mode On and
Off................................................................... 25
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.1.5
5.1.6
5.1.7
Command 964 – Erase the Programming
Key..................................................................38
Command 965 – Set Up Domestic Dialing
Format.............................................................38
Command 966 – Enable/Disable the
Automatic Stepping of Locations................38
5.1.8
5.1.9
Walk Test Mode ........................................... 26
Event Memory Recall Mode....................... 26
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | Contents
EN | 4
13.2.1 User Codes.....................................................54
7.4.9
7.5
Command 999 – Display the Panel Type or
Software Version Number........................... 39
Disable Factory Defaults.............................. 39
13.3
User Code Priority........................................55
14.0
14.1
Zone Information..........................................56
Day Alarm Information ...............................56
8.0
8.1
Alarm Link Software.................................... 40
Remote Connect........................................... 40
14.1.1 Day Alarm Resetting....................................56
14.1.2 Day Alarm Latching.....................................56
14.1.3 Day Alarm Operation ..................................56
8.1.1
Remote Connection with Customer Control
......................................................................... 40
8.1.2
8.1.3
Remote Connection without Callback
Verification.................................................... 41
Remote Connection with Callback
14.2
14.3
EOL Resistor Value......................................56
Zone Programming.......................................58
14.3.1 ICP-CC488 Zone Defaults...........................58
14.3.2 Zone Types ....................................................60
14.3.3 Zone Pulse Count..........................................61
14.3.4 Zone Pulse Count Time ...............................61
14.3.5 Zone Options 1..............................................61
14.3.6 Keyswitch Zone Options..............................62
14.3.7 Zone Options 2..............................................63
14.3.8 Zone Report Code........................................64
14.3.9 Zone Dialer Options.....................................64
Verification.................................................... 41
Direct Connection........................................ 41
Alarm Link Options..................................... 41
8.1.4
8.2
9.0
9.1
9.2
Domestic Dialing.......................................... 42
Domestic Dialing Function.......................... 42
Setting Up and Programming Domestic
Reporting....................................................... 43
10.0
10.1
Dialer Reporting Formats............................ 43
Transmission Formats.................................. 43
14.4
14.5
Swinger Shutdown Count for Siren............64
Swinger Shutdown Count for Dialer..........64
10.1.1 Contact ID Format....................................... 43
10.1.2 Contact ID Format....................................... 44
10.1.3 Point ID Codes ............................................. 44
10.1.4 4 + 2 Reporting Format............................... 44
10.1.5 Basic Pager Reporting Format.................... 45
15.0
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15.6
15.7
15.8
15.9
System Reporting Information....................65
Zone Status – Zone Tamper Report...........65
Zone Status – Walk Test Report.................65
Zone Status – Bypass Reports .....................65
Zone Status – Trouble Reports ...................65
Zone Status – Sensor Watch Reports.........66
Zone Status – Alarm Restore Code............66
Zone Status Reporting Options...................66
RF Supervision Time....................................66
RF Low Battery Report................................66
10.2
Basic Pager Display Information................ 48
11.0
11.1
Dialer Information........................................ 48
Primary Telephone Number for Receiver 1
and Receiver 2 .............................................. 49
Secondary Telephone Number for Receiver
1 and Receiver 2........................................... 49
Handshake Tone for Receiver 1 and
Receiver 2...................................................... 49
Transmission Format for Receiver 1 and
Receiver 2...................................................... 50
Subscriber ID Number for Receiver 1 and
Receiver 2...................................................... 50
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
15.10 RF Receiver Trouble Report.......................66
15.11 RF Receiver Trouble Restore Report ........67
15.12 RF Dialer Options.........................................67
15.13 Open/Close Reports.....................................67
15.14 Open/Close Reporting Options..................67
15.15 Codepad Duress Report...............................67
15.16 Codepad Panic Report.................................67
15.17 Codepad Fire Report....................................68
15.18 Codepad Medical Report.............................68
15.19 Codepad Reporting Options.......................68
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
Dialing Format.............................................. 50
Telco Arming Sequence .............................. 50
Telco Disarming Sequence.......................... 51
Call Back Telephone Number.................... 51
11.10 Ring Count.................................................... 51
11.11 Telephone Line Fault Options.................... 52
15.20 System Status – AUX Power Supply Fail
Report.............................................................68
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
Dialer Options............................................... 52
Dialer Options 1 ........................................... 52
Dialer Options 2 ........................................... 53
Dialer Options 3 ........................................... 53
Alarm Link Options..................................... 54
15.21 System Status – AUX Power Supply Fail
Restore Report...............................................68
15.22 System Status – AC Fail Report..................68
15.23 System Status – AC Fail Restore Report ...68
15.24 System Status – Low Battery Report..........69
15.25 System Status – Low Battery Restore Report
.........................................................................69
15.26 System Status – Access Denied...................69
13.0
13.1
13.2
Access Codes................................................. 54
Installer Code................................................ 54
User Codes.................................................... 54
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | Contents
EN | 5
User Code Allocations..................................86
Setting Up and Programming Codepads for
Partitioning.....................................................86
15.27 System Status Reporting Options............... 69
15.28 Test Reporting Time.................................... 69
15.29 Test Reporting Dialer Options ................... 70
19.5
19.6
19.6.1 Setting Up the Master Partitioned Codepad
as the Main Codepad ...................................87
19.6.2 Setting Up an Area 1 Codepad as the Main
Codepad.........................................................87
16.0
16.1
Programmable Outputs................................ 70
Redirecting Outputs to the Codepad Buzzer
......................................................................... 71
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.6
Output Event Types..................................... 71
Output Polarity ............................................. 76
Output Timing .............................................. 77
Pulsing Polarities........................................... 77
One-Shot Polarities....................................... 77
19.6.3 Setting Up an Area 1 Codepad...................87
19.6.4 Setting Up an Area 2 Codepad...................87
19.7
Codepad Connections For Partitioning -
Examples........................................................87
20.0
20.1
20.2
20.3
RF Information..............................................88
RF Option Bit................................................88
RF Device Mapping Option........................89
Default RF Device Mapping (Devices 1 to 8)
.........................................................................89
17.0
17.1
17.2
17.3
17.4
17.5
17.6
17.7
17.8
17.9
System Event Timers ................................... 77
Programming Entry/Exit Timers................ 78
Entry Timer 1................................................ 78
Entry Timer 2................................................ 78
Exit Timer...................................................... 78
Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode......... 78
Delay Alarm Reporting Time..................... 78
Sensor Watch Time...................................... 78
Codepad Lockout Time............................... 79
Siren Run Time............................................. 79
20.4
20.5
20.6
20.7
Default RF Device Mapping (Devices 9
to 16)...............................................................89
Using Hexadecimal Values for RF Device
Mapping .........................................................89
RF Device Signal Strength (Devices 1 to 8)
(Read Only) ...................................................90
RF Device Signal Strength (Devices 9 to 16)
(Read Only) ...................................................90
17.10 Siren Sound Rate.......................................... 79
17.11 Auto Arming Pre-Alert Timer .................... 79
17.12 Auto Arming Time....................................... 79
17.13 Auto Disarming Time.................................. 79
17.14 Kiss-Off Wait Time ...................................... 80
17.15 Speaker Beep Volume ................................. 80
17.16 System Time.................................................. 80
17.17 System Date................................................... 80
21.0
21.1
Optional Equipment.....................................90
RE012/RE013 2 Channel/4 Channel Hand
Held Transmitters 304 MHz........................90
21.2
21.3
21.4
21.5
21.6
21.7
21.8
RE005 2 Channel Radio Interface..............90
SS914 EDMSAT Satellite Siren ..................91
CC891 Programming Key...........................91
CC816 Alarm Link Software.......................91
ICP-CP508W Eight Zone LED Codepad..91
ICP-CP508LW Eight Zone LCD Codepad91
18.0
18.1
18.2
18.3
18.4
18.5
18.6
18.7
18.8
System and Consumer Options.................. 80
System Options 1.......................................... 80
System Options 2.......................................... 81
System Options 3.......................................... 81
System Options 4.......................................... 82
Consumer Options 1.................................... 82
Consumer Options 2.................................... 83
Consumer Options 3.................................... 83
Radio Input Options .................................... 83
ICP-CP500AW Eight Zone Area
Addressable Codepad...................................91
21.9
ICP-CP500PW Master Partitioned Codepad
.........................................................................91
21.10 CP105 Night Arm Station............................91
21.11 TF008 Plug Pack (TF008).............................91
22.0
22.1
22.2
22.3
Terminals and Descriptions.........................92
Terminal Descriptions..................................92
Glossary Of Terms........................................93
Diagrams ........................................................95
19.0
19.1
19.2
Partitioning .................................................... 84
CP500 Master Partitioned LED Codepad. 84
Using Codepads in a Partitioned System.. 84
19.2.1 Operating with a CP5 Area Addressable
LED Codepad............................................... 84
19.2.2 Operating with a CP5 Master Partitioned
Codepad......................................................... 84
23.0
23.1
23.2
Appendices.....................................................99
Appendix A – Telephone Anti-Jamming...99
Appendix B – Test Reports Only When
Armed.............................................................99
19.3
Programming................................................. 84
24.0
24.1
24.2
24.3
Specifications ...............................................100
Warranty Statement....................................100
Specifications ...............................................100
Software Version Number.........................100
19.3.1 Partitioning Options 1.................................. 85
19.3.2 Partitioning Options 2.................................. 85
19.4
Zone Allocations........................................... 85
19.4.1 Zone Allocations for Areas 1 and 2 ........... 86
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | Contents
EN | 6
Figure 28: Telecom Connection Diagram for China
24.4
24.5
New Zealand Telepermit Notes................ 100
A-Tick........................................................... 101
...................................................................98
25.0
25.1
Programming Sheets .................................. 101
ICP-CC488 Programming Sheets............. 101
Tables
Table 1:
Table 2:
Table 3:
Table 4:
Table 5:
Table 6:
Table 7:
Table 8:
Table 9:
Zone Defaults for the ICP-CC488..........9
Zone Types..............................................10
Zone Indicators.......................................10
STAY Indicator.......................................10
AWAY Indicator.....................................10
MAINS Indicator....................................11
FAULT indicator ....................................11
Audible Indicators..................................11
MAINS Indicator....................................12
26.0
Country Codes............................................ 110
Figures
Figure 1:
ICP-CP508W Eight Zone LED Codepad
..................................................................10
ICP-CP508LW Eight Zone LCD
Codepad ..................................................11
ICP-CP500PW Master Partitioned
Codepad ..................................................12
ICP-CP516W Sixteen Zone LED
Codepad ..................................................13
ICP-CP516LW Sixteen Zone LCD
Figure 2:
Figure 3:
Figure 4:
Figure 5:
Figure 6:
Table 10: Area On/Off Indicators .........................13
Table 11: Area Display Indicators .........................13
Table 12: AUX Indicator ........................................13
Table 13: PARTIAL Indicator................................13
Table 14: System FAULT indicators.....................19
Table 15: Fault Analysis Conditions......................20
Codepad ..................................................13
ICP-CP500PW LED Codepad Showing
Audible Alarm Buttons..........................16
Figure 7:
Figure 8:
Figure 9:
RF3332: 2-Button Keyfob Transmitter 20
RF3334: 4-Button Keyfob Transmitter 20
Basic Pager Display................................47
Table 16: Horn Speaker Indication Beeps for
Remote Operations ................................21
Table 17: Strobe Indications for Remote
Operations ...............................................21
Table 18: Codepad Indicators for Remote Radio
User Numbers .........................................21
Table 19: Installer Code Functions........................22
Table 20: Domestic Dialing Digits.........................23
Figure 10: Split EOL Resistors Using N/C Contacts
..................................................................57
Figure 11: Split EOL Resistors with Tamper Circuit
..................................................................57
Figure 12: Split EOL Resistors Using One N/O
Contact.....................................................57
Figure 13: Split EOL Resistors Using Two N/O
Contacts...................................................58
Table 21: Codepad Indicators When Changing
Phone Numbers ......................................24
Table 22: Telco Arm/Disarm Dialing Digits........24
Table 23: Telephone Monitor Mode Indications.26
Table 24: Event Sequence.......................................26
Table 25: Event Memory Playback .......................26
Table 26: Master Code Functions..........................27
Figure 14: Wiring Diagram for Keyswitch Zone ..63
Figure 15: Wiring Diagram for Keyswitch Zone
Using Split EOL with Tamper .............63
Figure 16: DIP Switch Location on Codepad.......76
Figure 17: ICP-CP500PW Master Partitioned
Codepad ..................................................84
Table 27: User Numbers Displayed by the
Codepad Indicators................................28
Figure 18: Area 1 Codepad Display.......................86
Figure 19: Area 2 Codepad Display.......................86
Figure 20: DIP Switch Location on Codepad.......87
Table 28: Remote Radio Numbers Displayed by
the Codepad Indicators..........................28
Table 29: Domestic Dialing Digits.........................29
Figure 21: Connections for CP-5 Master Partitioned
Codepad and CP-5 Area Addressable
Codepad ..................................................88
Figure 22: Connections for Two CP-5 Area
Addressable Codepads..........................88
Figure 23: ICP-CC488 Wiring Diagram................95
Figure 24: ICP-CC488 Component Overlay ........96
Figure 25: DSRF Radio Receiver Wiring Diagram
..................................................................97
Figure 26: Telecom Connection Diagram for
Australia...................................................97
Figure 27: Telecom Connection Diagram for New
Zealand ....................................................98
Table 30: Codepad Indicators When Changing
Domestic Telephone Numbers.............29
Table 31: Telco Arm/Disarm Dialing Digits........29
Table 32: Event Sequence.......................................31
Table 33: Event Memory Playback .......................32
Table 34: Codepad Indicators................................35
Table 35: Programming Option Bits Example.....36
Table 36: Installer’s Programming Mode
Commands...............................................36
Table 37: Command 965 Defaults.........................39
Table 38: Domestic Dialing Digits.........................43
Table 39: Contact ID Format Breakdown ............44
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | Contents
EN | 7
Table 40: Example Reporting in 4 + 2 Format...44
Table 41: 4 + 2 Reporting Format.........................44
Table 42: 4 + 2 Transmission Code Descriptions45
Table 43: Point ID Codes.......................................46
Table 44: Zone Status Display ...............................48
Table 45: Dialing Digits..........................................49
Table 46: Telco Arm/Disarm Dialing Digits .......51
Table 47: Priority Levels.........................................55
Table 48: Zone Types..............................................60
Table 49: Zone Pulse Count Times.......................61
Table 50: Zone Options 1.......................................61
Table 51: Keyswitch Zone Options.......................62
Table 52: Zone Options 2.......................................63
Table 53: Zone Dialer Options..............................64
Table 54: Output Parameters.................................70
Table 55: Horn Speaker Beeps ..............................73
Table 56: Event Type Polarities.............................76
Table 57: Time Base Settings.................................77
Table 58: Pulsing Time Settings.............................77
Table 59: One-Shot Time Settings.........................77
Table 60: Strobe Indications for Remote
Operations...............................................81
Table 61: User Code Allocations...........................86
Table 62: Hexadecimal Values for Zone Nos......90
Table 63: Terminal Descriptions ...........................92
Table 64: Glossary...................................................93
Table 65: Specifications.........................................100
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 1.0
Introduction
EN | 8
1.1
ICP-CC488 Features
1.0 Introduction
The ICP-CC488 security system uses the latest in
microprocessor technology to provide you with
useful features, and superior reliability and
performance.
Congratulations on selecting the ICP-CC488 Control
Panel for your installation. Take the time to read
through this guide and familiarize yourself with the
outstanding operating and installation features of this
system so you can get the most from your unit.
The control panel provides these features:
•
•
Eight programmable User Codes (1 to 8)
In all aspects of planning, engineering, styling,
operation, convenience, and adaptability, we try to
anticipate your every possible requirement.
Programming simplicity and speed are major
considerations; we believe that our objectives are
more than satisfied.
Eight variable User Codes (radio
remote/programmable User Codes (9 to 16))
•
Eight programmable hard-wired or sixteen
programmable wireless Burglary Zones
•
•
•
•
•
•
Partitionable to two separate areas
Dual reporting
This installation guide explains all aspects of
programming the ICP-CC488 Control Panel from
factory default to final commissioning. All system
parameters and options are detailed, but suitability is
left to the individual. Each control panel can be
tailored to meet your requirements quickly and
easily. The programming simplicity makes your
installation quick, accurate, and rewarding.
On-board Line Fault Module
Telco arming/disarming Sequence
Automatic arming and disarming
Codepad Duress, Panic, Fire, Medical, Access
Denied Alarms
As ICP-CC488 Control Panels continue to improve
over the years, they become very powerful. We have
addressed the needs of some early first-time users
who have advanced to true “power users,” while
maintaining simplicity of the product and the
installation guide.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
STAY Mode and AWAY Mode operation
Upload/download programmable
Dynamic battery testing
Entry and Exit Warning beeper
Remote arming
Answering machine bypass
AC fail and system FAULT indicators
Monitored Siren Output
Strobe Output
Relay Output
Separate Fire Alarm sound
EDMSAT – Satellite Siren-compatible
Zone lockout
Sensor watch
Day Alarm
Walk Test Mode
Delayed reporting
40 events in non-volatile memory
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 1.0
Introduction
Enter command [9 6 0] and press [AWAY] to exit
EN | 9
1.2
Quick Start
from Installer’s Programming Mode.
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators are extinguished. The system is
returned to the disarmed state and is ready for
use. Refer to Section 7.4 Installer’s Programming
Commands for more information.
The following steps allow you to use the ICP-CC488
Control Panel with factory default values. The default
values allow the control panel to communicate in the
Contact ID format. If you are not familiar with
programming the control panels, read the
information in Section 7.0 Programming before starting
the installation.
Use the Master Code to set the date and time.
Refer to Section 1.2.1 Set the Date and Time for
more information.
After all wiring is complete, connect the AC plug
pack to the control panel.
1.2.1
Set the Date and Time
Both the MAINS and AWAY indicators are lit.
The MAINS indicator lights to indicate the AC
MAINS supply is connected.
1. Enter your Master Code and press [6][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash.
The AWAY indicator lights to signify the system
2. Enter the day, month, year, hour, and minute in
DD, MM, YY, HH, MM format (where DD is
the day of the month, MM is the month of the
year, YY is the year, HH is the hour of the day,
and MM minute of the day) and press [AWAY].
Use 24:00 hour format when programming the
hour of the day.
is armed in AWAY Mode.
If any 24-Hour zones are unsealed when you
power up the system, the Siren, Strobe, and Bell
Outputs are activated into alarm and the
corresponding zone indicator flashes.
Enter the default Master Code (2580) and press
[AWAY] to disarm the system and to reset any
alarm that occurred when you powered up the
system.
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators are extinguished. If a long beep
sounds, there was an error when you entered the
date and time.
The AWAY indicator is extinguished to signify
that the system is disarmed.
Example
If any zone indicator is flashing, an alarm
occurred in that zone.
If a zone indicator is lit constantly, the zone is
To set the date and time for the 1st January 2004 at
10:30 PM, enter:
unsealed.
[2 5 8 0 6][AWAY][0 1 0 1 0 4 2 2 3 0][AWAY]
Connect the backup battery.
Enter the default Installer Code (1234) and press
[AWAY].
1.2.2
ICP-CC488 Zone Defaults
The default zone settings for the control panel are
listed in Table 1 on page 9. You can program Zones 1
to 8 to any of the zone types. Refer to Table 2 on
page 10 for the zone types you can select.
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash simultaneously to indicate that
you entered Installer’s Programming Mode.
When entering Installer’s Programming Mode,
you are automatically positioned at Location 000,
the first digit of the Primary Telephone Number
for Receiver 1.
Table 1:
Zone Defaults for the ICP-CC488
Zone
Zone Type
Delay-1
Handover
Handover
Handover
Zone
Zone Type
Instant
Instant
Instant
24-Hour Tamper
Enter the Primary Telephone Number, the
Secondary Telephone Number, and the
Subscriber ID Number for Receiver 1.
Refer to Sections 11.1, 11.2, and 11.5 for more
information about programming these numbers.
When programming the telephone numbers for
Receiver 1 and Receiver 2, you must program a
0 as a 10. Programming a 0 in the telephone
number indicates the end of the dialing
sequence. Unless otherwise stated, program a 0
as a 0 in all locations other than the telephone
numbers for Receiver 1 and Receiver 2, and the
Call Back Telephone Number.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If required, set the Test Report time.
Program any other required changes. Otherwise,
factory default settings are used. Refer to Section
15.28 Test Reporting Time for more information.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 2.0
1.2.3 Zone Types
Codepad Indicators
EN | 10
Zone Indicators
There are thirteen zone types to choose from when
programming zones for the ICP-CC488 Control
Panel. Refer to Section 14.3 Zone Programming for
more information.
Table 3:
Zone Indicators
Indicator
On
Off
Flashing fast
(0.25 sec. on/
0.25 sec. off)
Definition
The zone is unsealed.
The zone is sealed.
The zone is in alarm.
Table 2:
Zone Types
Type
Description
Type Description
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Instant
Handover
Delay-1
8
9
24-Hour Holdup
24-Hour Tamper
Reserved
Flashing slow
(1 sec. on/1 sec. off)
The zone is manually isolated.
10
11
12
13
14
15
STAY Indicator
Delay-2
Keyswitch
The STAY indicator lights when the system is armed
in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2. The STAY
indicator flashes with the AWAY indicator when you
are in Installer’s Programming Mode or you are
using a Master Code function.
Reserved
Reserved
24-Hour Medical
24-Hour Panic
24-Hour Burglary
24-Hour Fire
Chime only
Zone not used
For more information, refer to:
2.0 Codepad Indicators
•
•
Section 3.3 to arm the system in STAY Mode 1.
2.1
ICP-CP508W Eight Zone LED
Codepad
Section 14.3.5 to set zones to be automatically
isolated in STAY Mode 1.
Figure 1: ICP-CP508W Eight Zone LED
Codepad
•
•
Section 3.5 to arm the system in STAY Mode 2.
Section 5.1.5 to use the Installer Code to set zones
to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2.
•
Section 5.2.6 to use the Master Code to set zones
to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2.
Table 4:
STAY Indicator
Indicator
Definition
On
The system is armed in STAY
Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2.
Off
The system is not armed in STAY
Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2.
Zone isolating mode or setting STAY
Mode 2 zones.
The codepad is the communications interface
between you and the alarm system. The codepad
allows you to issue commands and offers visual and
audible indications to guide you through general
operation.
Flashing
Flashing once
every 3 sec
Day Alarm status on/off indicator
The codepad incorporates a number of indicators:
eight zone indicators show the condition of each zone
and four other indicators show general status. These
indicators are described in Table 3 through Table 8 on
pages 10 through 11.
AWAY Indicator
The AWAY indicator lights when the system is
armed in AWAY Mode. The AWAY indicator
flashes with the STAY indicator when you are in
Installer’s Programming Mode or you are using a
Master Code function.
Refer to Section 3.1 Arming the System in AWAY Mode
for more information.
Table 5:
AWAY Indicator
Indicator
On
Off
Definition
The system is armed in AWAY Mode.
The system is not armed in AWAY Mode.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 2.0
Codepad Indicators
EN | 11
MAINS Indicator
2.2
ICP-CP508LW Eight Zone LCD
Codepad
The MAINS indicator displays whether the system’s
AC MAINS supply is normal or failed.
Figure 2: ICP-CP508LW Eight Zone LCD
Codepad
When programming in Installer’s Programming
Mode or using a Master Code function, the MAINS
indicator lights to indicate a location value from 10 to
15. The MAINS indicator represents the 10 digit,
which is added to the value of the lit zone indicator
(for example, if the value programmed in a location
is 12, the MAINS and Zone 2 indicators light).
Table 6:
MAINS Indicator
Indicator
On
Flashing
Definition
The AC MAINS power is normal.
The AC MAINS supply failed.
The codepad is the communications interface
between you and the alarm system. The codepad
FAULT indicator
allows you to issue commands and offers visual and
audible indications to guide you through general
operation.
The FAULT indicator lights when the system detects
a system fault. Refer to Section 3.12 Fault Analysis
Mode on page 18 for more information on system
faults.
The codepad incorporates a number of indicators:
eight zone indicators show the condition of each zone
and seven other indicators show general status. These
indicators are described in the tables throughout this
section.
Each time a new system fault is detected (the FAULT
indicator flashes), the codepad beeps once per min.
Press [AWAY] to stop the beeping and to
acknowledge the fault.
Zone Indicators
Table 7:
FAULT indicator
The zone indicators (1 to 8) display the
status of the zones listed in Table 3 on
1 2 3 …
page 10.
Indicator
On
Off
Definition
A system fault must be corrected.
The system is normal (no faults).
A system fault must be acknowledged.
AWAY Indicator
The AWAY indicator lights when the
system is armed in AWAY Mode. The
ON indicator also lights when the
system is armed in AWAY Mode
(refer to Table 5 on page 10).
Flashing
Audible Indicators
The codepad provides these audible indications:
Table 8:
Audible Indicators
The AWAY indicator flashes with the STAY
indicator when you are in Installer’s Programming
Mode or you are using a Master Code function.
Audible Indicator Definition
Refer to Section 3.1 Arming the System in AWAY Mode
for more information.
One short beep
A button was pressed on the
codepad, or Exit Time ended when
arming in STAY Mode 1 or STAY
Mode 2.
STAY Indicator
The STAY indicator lights when the
system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or
STAY Mode 2 (refer to Table 4).
Two short beeps
Three short beeps The system executed the requested
function.
The system accepted your code.
One long beep
Exit Time ended when arming in
AWAY Mode, or the requested
operation was denied or aborted.
Walk Test Mode is currently active,
or warning before automatic arming
takes place.
The STAY indicator also flashes with the AWAY
indicator when you are in Installer’s Programming
Mode or you are using a Master Code function.
One short beep
every sec
The ON indicator also lights when the system is
armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2.
One short beep
every 2 sec
One short beep
every min
Telephone Monitor Mode is active.
For more information, refer to:
•
•
Section 3.3 to arm the system in STAY Mode 1.
There is a system fault to be
acknowledged.
Section 14.3.5 to set zones to be automatically
isolated in STAY Mode 1.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 2.0
Codepad Indicators
Audible Indicators
EN | 12
•
•
Section 3.5 to arm the system in STAY Mode 2.
The codepad provides a number of audible
indications. Refer to Table 8 on page 11.
Section 5.1.5 to use the Installer Code to set zones
to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2.
2.3
ICP-CP500PW Master Partitioned
LED Codepad
•
Section 5.2.6 to use the Master Code to set zones
to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2.
System Disarmed
This indicator lights with the OFF
indicator when the system is disarmed.
Figure 3: ICP-CP500PW Master Partitioned
Codepad
MAINS Indicator
The MAINS indicator displays whether
the systems AC MAINS supply is
normal or failed.
When programming in Installer’s Programming
Mode or using a Master Code function, the MAINS
indicator lights to indicate a location value from 10 to
15. The MAINS indicator represents the 10 digit,
which is added to the value of the lit zone indicator
(for example, if the value programmed in a location
is 12, the MAINS and Zone 2 indicators light).
This codepad is used only on a partitioned
ICP-CC488 Control Panel. The Master Partitioned
LED codepad allows a user to operate both areas
individually from the same codepad, without the
need to operate individual areas from separate
codepads.
Table 9:
MAINS Indicator
Indicator
On
Flashing
Definition
The AC MAINS power normal.
The AC MAINS supply failed.
The codepad is the communications interface
between you and the alarm system. The codepad
allows you to issue commands and offers visual and
audible indications to guide you through general
operation.
FAULT indicator
The FAULT indicator lights when the
system detects a system fault (refer to
Table 7 on page 11). Refer to Section 3.12
Fault Analysis Mode on page 18 for more
information on system faults.
The codepad incorporates a number of indicators:
eight zone indicators show the condition of each
zone, eight area indicators show the area status, and
four other indicators show general status. These
indicators are described in the tables throughout this
section.
Each time a new system fault is detected (the FAULT
indicator flashes), the codepad beeps once per min.
Press [AWAY] to stop the beeping and acknowledge
the fault.
Zone Indicators
Programming Mode
The zone indicators (1 to 8) show the status of each
zone as defined in Table 3 on page 10. The zones
belong to the area with the lit Area Display indicator.
These two indicators flash when you
enter Installer’s Programming Mode or
use any Master Code function.
Flashing
AREA ON/OFF Indicators
The group of four Area On/Off indicators shows the
status of each area as defined in Table 10 on page 13.
OFF Indicator/Zone Sealed
The OFF indicator lights when the
system is disarmed and flashes when a
zone becomes unsealed when disarmed.
The indicator stops flashing when all
zones are sealed.
If an area is armed in STAY Mode 1, the
corresponding Area On/Off indicator is lit in
conjunction with the PARTIAL indicator. If the area
is armed in AWAY Mode, only the ON/OFF
indicator is lit.
ON Indicator/Zone in Alarm
The ON indicator lights when the
system is armed and flashes when an
alarm occurs. The indicator is reset after
a valid User Code is entered.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 2.0
Codepad Indicators
EN | 13
Each time a new system fault is detected (the FAULT
indicator flashes), the codepad beeps once per min.
Table 10: Area On/Off Indicators
Press [AWAY] to stop the beeping and to
acknowledge the fault.
Indicator
On
Definition
The area is armed in AWAY
Mode or STAY Mode 1.
PARTIAL Indicator
The PARTIAL indicator lights when the system is
armed in STAY Mode 1. The PARTIAL indicator
flashes with the AUX indicator when Installer’s
Programming Mode or a Master Code function is
active. Refer to Table 13 on page 13.
Off
The area is disarmed.
Area Display Indicators
The group of four Area Display indicators shows the
area to which the eight zones belong. For example, if
the Area 1 indicator is lit, the Zones indicators
correspond to the zones assigned to that area.
Table 13: PARTIAL Indicator
Press [AWAY] to move to the next area display. For
example, if the Area 1 indicator is lit, pressing
[AWAY] extinguishes the Area 1 indicator and lights
the Area 2 indicator.
Indicator
On
Off
Definition
The system is armed in STAY Mode 1.
The system is not armed in STAY Mode 1.
Flashing
Installer’s Programming Mode or a Master
Code function is active.
Table 11: Area Display Indicators
Audible Indicators
Indicator
On
Off
Definition
Information is displayed for the area.
Information is not displayed for the area.
The codepad provides a number of audible
indications. Refer to Table 8 on page 11.
2.4
ICP-CP516 Sixteen Zone Codepads
AUX Indicator
The ICP-CP516 Sixteen Zone Codepad must be used
with sixteen wireless zone systems. The sixteen zone
codepads operation and display similarly to 8 zones
codepads, but also display zones 9 through 16.
If Options 8 is selected in Location 500 (refer to
Section 19.3.1 Partitioning Options 1 on page 85), the
AUX indicator lights when the control panel is using
the telephone line. The AUX indicator also flashes
with the PARTIAL indicator when Installer’s
Programming Mode or Master Code functions are
used.
Figure 4: ICP-CP516W Sixteen Zone LED
Codepad
Table 12: AUX Indicator
Indicator
Definition
On
The control panel is using the
telephone line.
Off
The control panel is not using the
telephone line.
Flashing
Installer’s Programming Mode or a
Master Code function is active.
MAINS Indicator
The MAINS indicator shows the status of the AC
MAINS supply (refer to Table 6 on page 11).
Figure 5: ICP-CP516LW Sixteen Zone LCD
Codepad
When programming in Installer’s Programming
Mode or using a Master Code function, the MAINS
indicator lights to indicate a location value from 10 to
15. The MAINS indicator represents the 10 digit,
which is added to the value of the lit zone indicator
(for example, if the value programmed in a location
is 12, the MAINS and Zone 2 indicators light).
FAULT indicator
The FAULT indicator lights when the system detects
a system fault (refer to Table 7 on page 11). Refer to
Section 3.12 Fault Analysis Mode on page 18 for more
information on system faults.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 3.0
System Operations
EN | 14
3.2
Disarming the System from AWAY
Mode
3.0 System Operations
This section explains the general operations of the
system: arming and disarming the system in the three
modes, isolating zones, initiating codepad alarms,
and determining a fault.
When you enter the premises after the system is
armed in AWAY Mode, you must disarm the system
from AWAY Mode to disable detection devices that
activate the sirens, strobe, and bell outputs.
3.1
Arming the System in AWAY Mode
If there was an alarm prior to disarming the system
from AWAY Mode, a zone indicator flashes,
indicating a previous alarm in that zone.
Arming the system in AWAY Mode is normally
performed when you leave the premises and require
that all zones are activated in a ready state to detect
an intrusion.
To disarm the system from AWAY Mode:
1. Enter your code and press [AWAY].
2. Two beeps sound and the AWAY indicator is
extinguished.
There are two different methods to arm the system in
AWAY Mode. You can always use method one.
You can use method two only if Option 2 is enabled
in Location 497 (refer to Section 18.6 Consumer
Options 2 on page 83).
3.3
Arming the System in STAY Mode 1
STAY Mode 1 is used when you need to arm the
perimeter and unused areas of the premises to detect
a would-be intruder entering the premises, while at
the same time being able to move freely within an
area that is automatically isolated.
If you must isolate a zone (or zones) before arming
the system in AWAY Mode, refer to Section 3.11
Isolating Zones on page 17.
Single button arming in AWAY Mode
reports as User Code number 16.
Only the installer can program zones to be
automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1. Refer to
Section 14.3.7 Zone Options 2 on page 63 for more
information on setting zones to be automatically
isolated in STAY Mode 1.
To arm the system in AWAY Mode (method one):
Enter your code and press [AWAY].
Two beeps sound, the AWAY indicator lights, and
Exit Time starts.
There are two methods to arm your system in STAY
Mode 1. You can always use method one. You can
use method two only if Option 2 is enabled in
Location 497 (refer to Section 18.6 Consumer Options 2
on page 83).
To arm the system in AWAY Mode (method two):
Select Option 2 in Location 497 to
enable single button arming in AWAY
Mode (refer to Section 18.6 Consumer
Options 2 on page 83).
If the system reports to a base station, it sends a
Partial Close Report (Contact ID Event Code 456).
Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode
1. Press and hold [AWAY].
When arming the system in STAY Mode 1, an
optional entry timer called Entry Guard Timer for
STAY Mode can be used to delay the sirens, strobe,
and bell outputs if a zone that is not automatically
isolated activates an alarm. Entry Guard Timer for
STAY Mode is the delay time used for all zones,
except 24-Hour zones, when the system is armed in
STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2.
2. When two beeps sound, release the button.
The AWAY indicator lights and Exit Time starts.
If a zone is not sealed at the end of Exit Time, the
zone is automatically isolated and its indicator is lit
on the remote codepad. The zone becomes an active
part of the system again as soon as it is resealed. For
example, if a window is open when Exit Time
expires, the window is not an active part of the
system until it is closed. Opening the window after
Exit Time expires causes an alarm.
If the Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode is
programmed and a zone that was not automatically
isolated is activated, the codepad beeps twice per sec
until the Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode expires
or the system is disarmed. If the alarm is not reset
before Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode expires,
the strobe, bell, and siren outputs are activated into
alarm.
Forced Arming
Arming the system when a zone is not sealed is
known as forced arming. Refer to Section 14.3.7 Zone
Options 2 on page 63 to enable forced arming for
each zone.
If the AWAY indicator does not light and a long
beep sounds when you attempt to arm the system in
AWAY Mode, forced arming is not permitted. If this
is the case, you seal all zones or manually isolate
them before you can arm the system.
Single button arming in STAY Mode 1
reports as User Code number 16.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 3.0
System Operations
EN | 15
To arm the system in STAY Mode 1 (method
one):
To disarm the system from STAY Mode 1
(method two):
1. Enter your code and press [STAY].
2. Two beeps sound and the STAY indicator is lit.
Exit Time starts.
A flashing zone indicator represents a previous alarm
in that zone. If this is the case, a valid User Code is
required to disarm the system using method one. To
enable method two, Option 4 in Location 497 must
be enabled (refer to Section 18.6 Consumer Options 2 on
page 83).
The indicators for any zones that are programmed to
be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1 begin to
flash until Exit Time expires. At the end of Exit
Time, the zone indicators are extinguished and the
codepad sounds one short beep.
1. Press and hold [STAY].
2. When two beeps sound, release the button.
The STAY indicator is extinguished and the
system is disarmed.
To arm the system in STAY Mode 1 (method
two):
1. Press and hold [STAY].
2. When two beeps sound, release the button.
The STAY indicator is lit and Exit Time starts.
Single button disarming from STAY
Mode 1 reports as User Code 16.
The indicators for any zones that are programmed to
be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1 flash until
Exit Time expires. At the end of Exit Time, the zone
indicators are extinguished and the codepad sounds
one short beep.
3.5
Arming The System in STAY Mode
2
STAY Mode 2 is used when you need to arm the
perimeter and unused areas of the premises to detect
a would-be intruder from entering the premises,
while at the same time being able to move freely
within an area that is automatically isolated.
If a zone is not sealed at the end of Exit Time, the
zone is automatically isolated and is lit constantly on
the remote codepad. The zone becomes an active
part of the system again as soon as it is resealed. For
example, if a window is open when Exit Time
expires, the window does not become an active part
of the system until it is closed. Opening the window
after Exit Time expires causes an alarm.
You can program zones to be automatically isolated
in STAY Mode 2 using an Installer Code function
(refer to Section 5.1.5) or a Master Code function
(Section 5.2.6).
If the system reports to a base station, it sends a
Partial Close Report (Contact ID Event Code 456).
Forced Arming
Arming the system when a zone is not sealed is
known as forced arming. Refer to Section 14.3.7 Zone
Options 2 on page 63 to enable forced arming for
each zone.
Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode
When arming the system in STAY Mode 2, an
optional entry timer called Entry Guard Timer for
STAY Mode can be used to delay the sirens, strobe,
and bell outputs if a zone that is not automatically
isolated activates an alarm. Entry Guard Timer for
STAY Mode is the delay time used for all zones,
except 24-Hour zones, when the system is armed in
STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2.
If the STAY indicator does not light and a long beep
sounds when you attempt to arm the system in STAY
Mode 1, forced arming is not permitted. If this is the
case, you must seal all zones or manually isolate
them before you can arm the system.
3.4
Disarming the System from STAY
Mode 1
If the Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode is
programmed and a zone that was not automatically
isolated is activated, the codepad beeps twice per sec
until the Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode expires
or the system is disarmed. If the alarm is not reset
before Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode expires,
the strobe, bell, and siren outputs are activated into
alarm.
There are two methods to disarm the system from
STAY Mode 1. You can always use the first method.
You can use method two only if Option 4 is enabled
in Location 497 (refer to Section 18.6 Consumer
Options 2 on page 83).
To disarm the system from STAY Mode 1
(method one):
1. Enter your code and press [STAY].
Single button disarming from STAY
Mode 2 reports as User Code 16.
2. Two beeps sound and the STAY indicator is
extinguished. The system is now disarmed.
To arm the system in STAY Mode 2:
1. Press and hold [0].
2. When two beeps sound, release the button.
The STAY indicator is lit and the Exit Time
starts.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 3.0
System Operations
EN | 16
The indicators for any zones that are programmed to
be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2 flash until
the Exit Time expires. At the end of Exit Time, the
zone indicators are extinguished and the codepad
sounds one short beep.
3.7
Codepad Duress Alarm
Figure 6: ICP-CP500PW LED Codepad
Showing Audible Alarm Buttons
If a zone is not sealed at the end of Exit Time, the
zone is automatically isolated and is lit constantly on
the remote codepad. The zone becomes an active
part of the system again as soon as it is resealed. For
example, if a window is open when Exit Time
expires, the window does not become an active part
of the system until it is closed. Opening the window
after Exit Time expires causes an alarm.
Forced Arming
Arming the system when a zone is not sealed is
known as forced arming. Refer to Section 14.3.7 Zone
Options 2 on page 63 to enable forced arming for
each zone.
If the STAY indicator does not light and a long beep
sounds when attempting to arm the system, forced
arming is not permitted. If this is the case, you must
seal all zones or manually isolate them before you
can arm the system.
A codepad Duress Alarm is used as a silent holdup
alarm when 9 is added to the end of a valid User
Code being used to disarm the system. If a User
Code has a priority level that allows arming only,
that User Code can transmit a Duress Alarm when
the system is armed.
3.6
Disarming the System from STAY
Mode 2
There are two methods to disarm the system from
STAY Mode 2. You can always use the first method.
You can use method two only if Option 4 is enabled
in Location 497 (refer to Section 18.6 Consumer
Options 2 on page 83).
A Duress Alarm (Contact ID Event Code 121) is
useful only if your system reports to a monitoring
station or pocket pager because domestic reporting
format cannot decipher the type of alarm that
occurred. You can disable the codepad Duress Alarm
Report by programming 0 in Location 394 (refer to
Section 15.15 Codepad Duress Report). You can select
Option 2 in Location 498 to use 3 instead of 9 to
activate a Duress Alarm (refer to Section 18.7
Consumer Options 3 on page 83).
To disarm the system from STAY Mode 2
(method one):
1. Enter your code and press [STAY].
2. Two beeps sound and the STAY indicator is
extinguished. The system is now disarmed.
To disarm the system from STAY Mode 2
(method two):
A flashing zone indicator represents a previous alarm
in that zone. If this is the case, a valid User Code is
required to disarm the system using method one. To
enable method two, Option 4 in Location 497 must
be enabled (refer to Section 18.6 Consumer Options 2 on
page 83).
3.8
Codepad Panic Alarm
An audible codepad Panic Alarm activates when a
user presses either [1] and [3] or [STAY] and
[AWAY] simultaneously.
Select Option 1 in Location 493 to program the
codepad Panic Alarm as silent (refer to Section 18.2
System Options 2 on page 81). To disable the codepad
Panic Alarm Report, program Locations 405 and 406
to 0 (refer to Section 15.16 Codepad Panic Report on
page 66). A codepad Panic Alarm transmits Contact
ID Event Code 120 if the system reports to a base
station receiver.
1. Press and hold [0].
2. When two beeps sound, release the button.
The STAY indicator is extinguished and the
system is disarmed.
Single button disarming from STAY
Mode 2 reports as User Code16.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 3.0
System Operations
EN | 17
3.11.1
Standard Isolating
3.9
Codepad Fire Alarm
Standard isolating allows any operator to isolate
zones because no code is required.
1. Press [STAY] twice.
Three beeps sound and the STAY indicator
flashes.
An audible codepad Fire Alarm activates when a
user presses [4] and [6] on the remote codepad
simultaneously. A distinct fire sound emits through
the horn speaker to indicate this type of alarm. The
fire sound is different than the burglary sound.
2. Enter the number of the zone to be isolated and
press [STAY].
Select Option 2 in Location 493 to program the
codepad Fire Alarm as silent (refer to Section 18.2
System Options 2 on page 81). To disable the codepad
Fire Alarm Report, program Locations 407 and 408
to 0 (refer to Section 15.17 Codepad Fire Report). A
codepad Fire Alarm transmits a Contact ID Event
Code 110 to a base station receiver.
The indicator for the zone flashes.
24-Hour zones are automatically isolated as soon
as you press [STAY]. All other Burglary Zones
are automatically isolated only after the system is
armed.
3. Repeat Step 2 for each zone you want to isolate.
3.10 Codepad Medical Alarm
An audible codepad Medical Alarm activates when a
user presses [7] and [9] simultaneously.
As each zone is selected to be isolated,
the corresponding zone indicator flashes.
If you make a mistake, enter the incorrect
zone number and press [STAY]. This zone
is no longer selected to be isolated and
the zone indicator is extinguished.
Select Option 4 in Location 493 to program codepad
Medical Alarm as silent (refer to Section 18.2 System
Options 2 on page 81). To disable reporting of the
codepad Medical Alarm Report, program Locations
409 and 410 to 0 (refer to Section 15.18 Codepad
Medical Report). A codepad Medical Alarm transmits a
Contact ID Event Code 100 to a base station
receiver.
4. Press [AWAY].
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the
disarmed state.
The indicators for the selected zones continue to
flash until the next time the system is disarmed.
Example
3.11 Isolating Zones
To manually isolate zones 1, 3, and 4, press:
Isolating zones allows you to manually disable one or
more zones before arming the system in AWAY
Mode, STAY Mode 1, or STAY Mode 2. When a
zone is isolated, access is allowed into that zone when
the system is armed without activating an alarm.
[STAY][STAY][1][STAY][3][STAY][4][STAY]
[AWAY]
3.11.2
Code to Isolate
The code to isolate method permits only those User
Code holders with a priority level that includes Code
to Isolate. The standard isolating method is disabled
for any User Code with this priority level set.
For example, you might want to isolate a zone before
arming the system because a zone passive infrared
(PIR) detector is activating false alarms or because
you need to leave a pet inside a particular zone while
you are away.
1. Press [STAY].
2. Enter your code and press [STAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY indicator
flashes.
You can isolate zones using one of two methods. One
method requires a valid User Code and the other
does not. The ability to isolate zones is determined
by the priority level assigned to each User Code
holder. Some User Code holders cannot isolate
zones. Refer to Section 13.3 User Code Priority for more
information. By default, the standard isolation
method is used.
If you attempt to enter isolating mode with a
User Code that is not set for Code to Isolate, the
system ignores the attempt.
3. Enter the number of the zone to be isolated and
press [STAY].
The indicator for the zone flashes.
24-Hour zones are automatically isolated as soon
you press [STAY]. All other Burglary zones are
automatically isolated only after the system is
armed.
Zones that are manually isolated using this method
transmit a Zone Bypass Report (Contact ID Event
Code 570) for each isolated zone when the system is
armed. A Zone Bypass Restore Report is transmitted
when the system is disarmed.
4. Repeat Step 3 for each zone you want to isolate.
When you select a 24-Hour Burglary Zone to be
isolated, a Contact ID Event Code 572 is sent. If you
select a 24-Hour Fire Zone to be isolated, a Contact
ID Event Code 571 is sent.
As each zone is selected to be isolated,
the corresponding zone indicator flashes.
If you make a mistake, enter the incorrect
zone number and press [STAY]. This zone
is no longer selected to be isolated and
the zone indicator is extinguished.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 3.0
System Operations
4 – Sensor Watch Fault
EN | 18
5. Press [AWAY].
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the
disarmed state.
The indicators for the selected zones continue to
flash until the next time the system is disarmed.
This fault occurs when one or more detection devices
fails to detect an intrusion while disarmed for the
time period programmed in Locations 476 and 477
(refer to Section 15.5 Zone Status – Sensor Watch
Reports on page 78). The fault clears when the
faulted zone detects movement and is reset.
Example
To manually isolate zones 1, 3, and 4, press:
In Fault Analysis Mode, hold down [4] until two
beeps sound to show the zone that reported the fault.
[STAY][User Code][STAY][1][STAY][3][STAY][4]
[STAY][AWAY]
5 – RF Sensor Watch Fault
3.12 Fault Analysis Mode
When a system fault occurs, the FAULT or MAINS
indicator flashes and the codepad beeps once per
minute.
This fault occurs when one or more wireless
detection devices fails to detect an intrusion while
disarmed state for the time programmed in Locations
476 and 477 (refer to Section 15.5 Zone Status – Sensor
Watch Reports on page 78). The fault clears when
the faulted zone detects movement and is reset.
If the AC MAINS supply fails, the MAINS indicator
flashes until the AC MAINS supply is restored. Press
[AWAY] once to acknowledge the fault and stop the
codepad from beeping once every minute.
In Fault Analysis Mode, hold down [5] until two
beeps sound to show the zone that reported the fault.
To enter Fault Analysis Mode to determine a
system fault other than the AC MAINS supply:
6 – Communication Fail
A communication failure registers when the control
panel fails to communicate with the receiving party
(for example, monitoring company, mobile phone, or
pocket pager).
1. Press and hold [5] until two beeps sound.
The FAULT indicator remains lit and the STAY
and AWAY indicators flash.
The lit zone indicators indicate the type of fault
that occurred. Refer to Table 15 on page 20.
2. If necessary, hold down the button
corresponding to the indicator to further
determine the fault. Refer to Table 15 on page 20.
3. To exit from Fault Analysis Mode, press
[AWAY].
The communication fault clears when the control
panel successfully reports to the receiving party.
In Fault Analysis Mode, hold down [6] until two
beeps sound to show which communication fault
occurred: 1 – Receiver 1; 2 – Receiver 2.
The STAY and AWAY indicators are
extinguished and the FAULT indicator remains
lit.
3.13 Fault Descriptions
1 – System Fault
The system FAULT indicator lights when any of the
faults listed in Table 14 on page 19 occurs. In Fault
Analysis Mode, hold down [1] to determine the fault
that occurred.
2 – RF Low Battery
This fault occurs when a wireless zone (1 to 16)
reports a low battery condition. In Fault Analysis
Mode, hold down [2] until two beeps sound to light
the indicator for the zone that reported the fault.
3 – Tamper Fail
This fault occurs when a zone becomes open circuit.
In Fault Analysis Mode, hold down [3] until two
beeps sound to display the zone that reported the
fault.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 3.0
System Operations
AC MAINS Failure
EN | 19
Table 14: System FAULT indicators
An AC MAINS supply failure automatically flashes
the MAINS indicator. If the AC MAINS supply is
disconnected continuously for longer than 2 min, the
remote codepad beeps the codepad buzzer once per
min. If the control panel is programmed to report an
AC MAINS failure to a base station receiver, an AC
Fail Report (Contact ID Event Code 301) is
transmitted.
Indicator
1
Fault Description
Low battery
This fault registers when the system detects
a low capacity backup battery. The system
automatically performs a battery test every
4 hours and every time you arm the system.
2
Date and time
This fault registers when the system is
powered down. The fault does not cause
the FAULT indicator to light on the codepad
unless automatic arming time is
programmed. To program the date and time,
refer to Section 5.2.8.
The MAINS indicator stops flashing when the AC
MAINS supply is reconnected. When the AC
MAINS supply is connected continuously for 2 min,
the codepad stops the once per min beep and an AC
Fail Restore Report is transmitted to the base station
receiver.
3
4
RF receiver fault
This fault registers when the RF wireless
receiver unit detects RF jamming, the RF
wireless receiver is disconnected from the
control panel or failed, or the RF receiver’s
cover tamper switch is activated.
If the Enable AC Fail in 1 Hour option (1) is selected
in Location 494 (refer to Section 18.3 System Options 3
on page 81), the codepad flashes the MAINS
indicator when the AC MAINS supply is
disconnected, but does not activate the dialer or the
codepad buzzer unless the AC MAINS supply is
disconnected continuously for 1 hour.
Horn speaker
This fault registers when the system detects
the horn speaker is disconnected. This fault
clears when the horn speaker is
reconnected. This feature is enabled by
selecting Option 2 in Location 492 (refer to
Section 18.1 System Options 1).
If the Ignore AC MAINS Fail option (2) is selected in
Location 494 (refer to Section 18.3 System Options 3 on
page 81 the codepad does not indicate when the AC
MAINS supply fails, but the control panel still
reports an AC Fail Report, if enabled.
5
Telephone line fault
This fault registers when the system detects
the telephone line is disconnected from the
control panel. This feature is enabled by
selecting Option 1 in Location 176 (refer to
Section 11.11 Telephone Line Fault
Options).
6
7
EEPROM fail
This fault registers when the system detects
an internal checksum error. Contact your
installer if this fault is displayed.
AUX Power Supply fail
This fault occurs when the AUX Power
Supply has failed. Contact your installer
when this fault occurs.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 4.0 Remote Radio Transmitter Operations
EN | 20
Table 15: Fault Analysis Conditions
Zone Indicator Fault Description
Hold Down Button
Zone Indicator
Fault Condition
1
System fault
1
1
2
3
Low battery
Date and time
RF receiver jamming
RF receiver tamper switch
RF receiver communications fail
Horn speaker
4
5
6
Telephone line fail
EEPROM fail
7
AUX Power Supply fail
Zones 1 to 16 RF low battery
Zones 1 to 16 Tamper Alarm
Zones 1 to 16 sensor watch fail
Zones 1 to 16 RF sensor watch fail
Receiver 1 fail
2
3
4
5
6
RF low battery
2
3
4
5
6
1 to 16
1 to 16
1 to 16
1 to 16
1
Zone Tamper Alarm
Sensor watch fail
RF sensor watch
Communications fail
2
Receiver 2 fail
4.0 Remote Radio Transmitter
Operations
Figure 8: RF3334: 4-Button Keyfob
Transmitter
The ICP-CC488 Control Panel can be remotely
operated using hand-held remote radio transmitters.
You can use either a 2-button or a 4-button hand-
held transmitter to operate the system.
1
5
2
Figure 7: RF3332: 2-Button Keyfob
Transmitter
1
3
2
4
1 – Arm button
2 – Disarm button
3 – Option 1 button
4 – Option 2 button.
3
5 – Arm and Disarm buttons: Press both buttons
at same time for 2 sec to send a Panic alarm
1 – Arm button
2 – Disarm button
3 – Arm and Disarm buttons: Press both buttons
at same time for 2 sec to send a Panic alarm
The 2-button and 4-button hand-held transmitters
can remotely arm and disarm the system in AWAY
Mode or STAY Mode 1, and can activate remote
Panic Alarms. The 4-button hand-held transmitter
has the added ability to operate the control panel’s
programmable outputs to activate a garage door or
outside lights, for example.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 4.0 Remote Radio Transmitter Operations
EN | 21
Before a hand-held radio transmitter can operate the
4.3
Changing or Deleting Remote
Radio User Codes
control panel, you must teach the transmitter’s radio
code to the control panel. Refer to Section 4.3
Changing or Deleting Remote Radio User Codes for more
information.
You can use up to eight remote radio hand-held
transmitters (User Codes 9 to 16) to operate the
system. Before the control panel accepts a signal
from a remote radio hand-held transmitter, the
control panel must learn the transmitter’s code.
4.1
Indications from Remote Radio
Transmitter Operations
When using the 2-channel or 4-channel hand-held
transmitter to operate the system, audible or visual
indications, or both, can be provided by the horn
speakers or the strobe. These indications allow you to
operate the system from outside the premises with
confidence. The installer can program audible and
visual indication beeps by selecting Options 4 and 8
in Location 492 (refer to Section 18.1 System Options 1
on page 80). You can adjust the speaker beep volume
in Location 491 (refer to Section 17.15).
You can substitute the Installer Code for
the Master Code below to change or
delete remote radio User Codes.
To add or change a remote radio User Code:
1. Enter the Master Code and press [1][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash.
2. Enter the user number (9 to 16) you want to add
or change and press [AWAY].
Two beeps sound and the corresponding zone
indicators light. Refer to Table 18 on page 21.
Table 16: Horn Speaker Indication Beeps for
Remote Operations
Table 18: Codepad Indicators for Remote Radio
User Numbers
No of Beeps
One
System Status
System disarmed
Two
System armed in AWAY Mode
System armed in STAY Mode 1
Data
Value
9
Zone Indicators
One two-tone beep
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MAINS
X
X
10
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Table 17: Strobe Indications for Remote
Operations
11
X
12
X
13
X
Strobe Duration
3 sec
System Status
System disarmed
14
X
15
X
6 sec
6 sec
System armed in AWAY Mode
System armed in STAY Mode 1
16
X
3. Enter the nine-digit RF ID number located on
the back of the hand-held transmitter and press
[AWAY].
4.2
Remote Radio User Code Priority
Levels
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators are extinguished.
You can program the remote radio hand-held
transmitters to operate only as User Codes 9 to 16.
You can assign priority levels to each hand-held
transmitter, allowing the transmitter to arm the
system only, or to arm and disarm the system, for
example. Refer to Section 13.3 User Code Priority for
more information.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 to add or change another
remote radio User Code.
This function is automatically terminated if
you do not press a button within 60 sec
or if you press [AWAY].
One long beep indicates that the code
already exists or you selected an incorrect
user number.
Before a hand-held radio transmitter can operate the
control panel, you must teach the transmitter’s radio
code to the control panel. Refer to Section 4.3
Changing or Deleting Remote Radio User Codes for more
information.
When using a partitioned ICP-CC488
Control Panel, you must allocate the
remote radio User Codes to one or more
areas (refer to Section 19.5 User Code
Allocations).
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 5.0
System Functions
EN | 22
To delete a remote radio User Code:
Table 19: Installer Code Functions
1. Enter the Master Code and press [1][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash.
Function
Description
2. Enter the user number (9 to 16) you want to
delete and press [AWAY].
0
Add/delete RF wireless devices
(Refer to Section 5.1.1)
Set the number of days until the first Test
Report
(Section 5.1.2)
Change domestic telephone numbers
(Section 5.1.3)
Change the Telco arm/disarm sequence
(Section 5.1.4)
Set STAY Mode 2 zones
(Section 5.1.5)
Satellite Siren (EDMSAT) Service Mode
(Section 5.1.6)
Turn Telephone Monitor Mode on and off
(Section 5.1.7)
Walk Test Mode
Two beeps sound and the corresponding zone
indicators light. Refer to Table 18 on page 21.
3. Press [STAY] to delete the User Code.
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators are extinguished.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 to delete another remote
radio User Code.
This function is automatically terminated if
you do not press a button within 60 sec
or if you press [AWAY].
One long beep indicates that you
selected an incorrect user number.
(Section 5.1.8)
Event Memory Recall Mode
(Section 5.1.9)
5.0 System Functions
This section explains more advanced features, such
as Installer Code, Master Code, and hold-down
functions that are required for testing and regular
maintenance of the system.
5.1.1
Add or Delete RF Wireless Devices
The control panel can accept up to 16 wireless
devices on any or all of the eight zones used by the
system. It is possible to connect wireless PIRs, reed
switches, and smoke detectors directly to the control
panel. You can allocate multiple wireless devices to
each zone (for example, you can allocate up to 16
wireless devices to Zone 1 and hard wire the
remaining seven zones). Refer to Section 20.3 Default
RF Device Mapping (Devices 1 to 8) and Section 20.4
Default RF Device Mapping (Devices 9 to 16) for more
information.
5.1
Installer Code Functions
Installer Code functions allow the installer to perform
various system tests and tasks without knowing a
Master Code.
To access the required Installer Code function, enter
the Installer Code and corresponding function digit,
and press [AWAY]. The Installer Code functions are
listed in Table 19 on page 22.
To program an RF wireless device:
You can access these functions only when the system
is disarmed.
1. Enter the Installer Code and press [0][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash.
2. Enter the RF device number (1 to 16) you want
to change and press [AWAY].
Two beeps sound and the corresponding
codepad indicators light to show the RF device
number you selected.
3. Enter the nine-digit RF ID number found on the
back of the RF device and press [AWAY].
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators are extinguished.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 to add another device.
This function is automatically terminated if
you do not press a button within 60 sec
or if you press [AWAY].
One long beep indicates that you
selected an incorrect user number.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 5.0
System Functions
EN | 23
Example
5.1.3
Change Domestic Phone Numbers
To program RF wireless device number 3 whose 9-
digit ID number is 000094946, enter
When the system is set up for domestic dialing, this
function allows the installer to view and program the
telephone numbers the system calls if an alarm
occurs. Refer to Section 9.0 Domestic Dialing on page
42 for more information.
[1 2 3 4 0][AWAY][3][AWAY]
[0 0 0 0 9 4 9 4 6][AWAY]
To delete an RF wireless device:
To change domestic phone numbers:
1. Enter the Installer Code and press [0][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash.
2. Enter the RF device number (1 to 16) you want
to delete and press [AWAY].
1. Enter the Installer Code and press [2][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash.
If no telephone numbers are programmed, they
are displayed one digit at a time using the remote
codepad indicators. Refer to Table 21 on page 24
for the indicators and their meanings.
If no telephone numbers are programmed, an
additional two beeps sound after entering this
mode. These two beeps normally sound after
you enter the last digit of the last phone number.
2. Enter the first phone number.
Each digit is displayed as you enter it.
3. If you are programming another phone number,
press [STAY][4] to separate the end of one
phone number and the beginning of the next.
If you are not programming other numbers, go
to Step 5.
Two beeps sound and the corresponding
codepad indicators light to show the RF device
number you selected.
3. Press [STAY] to delete the RF device.
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators are extinguished.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 to delete another RF wireless
device.
5.1.2
Set the Number of Days until the First
Test Report
This function determines when the system sends the
first Test Report (Contact ID Event Code 602). If you
do not use this Installer Code function, the first Test
Report is sent to the base station receiver after the
repeat interval programmed in Location 428 (refer to
Section 15.28 Test Reporting Time). If you want the
system to send the first Test Report sooner than the
repeat interval, use this function to set when the first
Test Report is sent.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to program another phone
number.
5. Press [AWAY] to exit from this mode.
Table 20: Domestic Dialing Digits
To set the first Test Report:
Digit
Required
Number to
Program
Digit
Required
8
9
Number to
Program
8
9
1. Enter the Installer Code and press [1][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash.
2. Enter the number of days (1 to 15) until the first
Test Report is sent and press [AWAY].
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators are extinguished. The system returns
to the disarmed state.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
*
#
[STAY]1
[STAY]2
[STAY]3
[STAY]4
[STAY]5
4 sec pause
break
15
Each time you enter Installer’s
Programming Mode, the first Test Report
time defaults back to the repeat interval
set in Location 434.
Example
If you want to program two separate telephone
numbers (9672 1777 and 9672 1233), enter:
The number of days decrements by one at
2400 hours as set in Locations 901 to
904 (refer to Section 17.16 System
Time).
[1 2 3 4 2][AWAY][9 6 7 2 1 7 7 7][STAY]
[4 9 6 7 2 1 2 3 3][[AWAY]
You can suspend domestic dialing at any time (for
example, you are moving house and do not want the
system to continue calling your work place or mobile
phone).
Example
If the repeat interval is set to 7 days, but you want
the first Test Report to be sent in 2 days, enter:
To disable domestic dialing:
[1 2 3 4 1][AWAY][2][AWAY]
Enter the Installer Code and press [2][AWAY]
[STAY][4][AWAY].
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 5.0
System Functions
EN | 24
Table 21: Codepad Indicators When Changing
Phone Numbers
Table 22: Telco Arm/Disarm Dialing Digits
Digit
Required
Number to
Program
Digit
Required
Number to
Program
Zone Indicators
MAINS
Indicator
X
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8
9
Digit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
X
*
#
[STAY]1
[STAY]2
[STAY]3
[STAY]4
2
X
3
X
4 sec pause
break
4
X
5
X
6
X
To program the telco arming sequence:
7
X
1. Enter the Installer Code and press [3][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash.
2. Press [1][AWAY] to change the telco arming
sequence. Three beeps sound.
8
X
X
9
X
X
*
X
X
X
X
X
#
X
Pause
Break
15
X
If a call forwarding sequence is already
programmed, the sequence is displayed one digit
at a time using the remote codepad indicators.
Refer to Table 21 on page 24 for the indicators
and their meanings.
If no call forward sequence is programmed, an
additional two beeps sound after entering this
mode. These two beeps normally sound after the
last digit of the call forward sequence is
displayed.
X
X
5.1.4
Change Telco Arm/Disarm Sequence
This function allows you to program the call forward
sequence to automatically operate when you arm the
system in AWAY Mode. This feature is available
only if the call forward option is available from your
telecommunication provider.
Telco Arm Sequence
3. Enter the desired call forward sequence.
For example, program [* 6 1][phone number][#]
for the call forward – no answer sequence, or [* 2
1][phone number][#] for the call forward –
immediate sequence.
This option allows you to program the Call Forward
– Immediate On sequence or Call Forward – No
Answer sequence that automatically operates when
you arm the system in the AWAY Mode..
Remember that when you program a * in
the telco arm sequence, you enter
[STAY][1]. When you program the # in
the telco arm sequence, you enter
[STAY][2].
The examples provided for this feature
apply only to Australia.
•
•
Call Forward – Immediate On
4. Press [STAY][2][AWAY].
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the
disarmed state.
You can redirect calls to anywhere in Australia,
including mobiles, pagers, and answering
services. When this Call Forward option is
turned on, your telephone does not ring.
Example
Call Forward – No Answer
If you want to automatically divert all unanswered
incoming calls to another telephone number (for
example, 9672 1777) when the system is armed in
AWAY Mode, enter:
If your telephone is not answered within 20 sec,
this feature redirects the incoming call to another
number anywhere in Australia. You can still
make outgoing calls.
[1 2 3 4 3][AWAY][1][AWAY][STAY]
[1 6 1 9 6 7 2 1 7 7 7][STAY][2][AWAY]
Telco Disarming Sequence
This option allows you to automatically disable the
call forward sequence when you disarm the system.
You can suspend the telco arming sequence at any
time. To disable the telco arming sequence:
Enter the Installer Code and press [3][AWAY][1]
[AWAY][STAY][4][AWAY].
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 5.0
System Functions
EN | 25
To program the telco disarm sequence:
As each zone is selected to be isolated,
1. Enter the Installer Code and press [3][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash.
2. Press [2][AWAY] to change the telco disarming
sequence.
the corresponding zone indicator flashes.
If you make a mistake, enter the incorrect
zone number and press [STAY]. This zone
is no longer selected to be isolated and
the zone indicator is extinguished.
Three beeps sound.
This function does not work on a
partitioned ICP-CC488 Control Panel.
If a telco disarming sequence is already
programmed, the sequence is displayed one digit
at a time using the remote codepad indicators.
Refer to Table 21 on page 24 for the indicators
and their meanings.
4. Press [AWAY].
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the
disarmed state.
The indicators for the zones you selected and the
STAY indicator are extinguished.
If no telco disarming sequence is programmed,
an additional two beeps sound after entering this
mode. These two beeps normally sound after the
last digit of the sequence is displayed.
3. Enter the desired call forward disable sequence.
For example, program [# 6 1 #] to disable the
call forward – no answer sequence, or [# 2 1 #]
to disable the call forward – immediate sequence.
Example
If you want to select zones 2, 5, and 6, enter:
[1 2 3 4 4][AWAY][2][STAY][5][STAY][6][STAY]
[AWAY]
You can disable all zones selected to be automatically
isolated for STAY Mode 2 at any time. To disable
STAY Mode 2 zones:
Remember that when you program a # in
the telco arm sequence, you enter
[STAY][2].
Enter the Installer Code and press [4][AWAY]
[AWAY].
4. Press [AWAY].
5.1.6
Satellite Siren Service Mode
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the
disarmed state.
If the SS914 Satellite Siren (EDMSAT) is connected
to Output 1, this function allows you to perform
service work on the system without activating the
satellite siren. The satellite siren returns to its normal
working state the next time the system is armed.
You can suspend the telco disarming sequence at any
time.
To disable the telco disarming sequence:
Enter the Installer Code and press [3][AWAY][2]
[AWAY][STAY][4][AWAY].
To enter Satellite Siren Service Mode:
Enter the Installer Code and press [5][AWAY].
Three beeps sound.
5.1.5
Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones
This function allows the installer to select the zones
that are automatically isolated when the system is
armed in STAY Mode 2.
5.1.7
Turning Telephone Monitor Mode On
and Off
Telephone Monitor Mode allows you to use the
remote codepad for visual representation of data
transmissions between the control panel and the base
station receiver. The dialing sequence is also shown
in this mode.
To arm the system in STAY Mode 2, press and hold
[0] until two beeps sound. Refer to Section 5.4.3 or
Section 3.5 Arming The System in STAY Mode 2 for more
information.
To set STAY Mode 2 zones:
The codepad beeps once every two sec when
Telephone Monitor Mode is active, whether the
system is in Installer’s Programming Mode or normal
operating mode. The first five indicators show the
progressive steps during a transmission to the base
station receiver.
1. Enter the Installer Code and press [4][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY indicator
flashes.
2. Enter the number of the zone you want to
automatically isolate and press [STAY].
The corresponding zone indicator flashes.
3. Repeat Step 2 for each zone you want to select.
After you activate Telephone Monitor Mode, hold
down [9] until two beeps sound to initiate a Test
Report.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 5.0
System Functions
EN | 26
To enter Event Memory Recall Mode:
Enter the Installer Code and press [8][AWAY].
Table 23: Telephone Monitor Mode Indications
Three beeps sound. The events are played back by
the codepad indicators in reverse chronological
order.
Zone LED
1
2
3
4
5
None
Dialing Event
Telephone line seized
Dialing phone number
Handshake received
Data is being transmitted
Kiss-off received
Example
If the events occurred in the following order:
Table 24: Event Sequence
Telephone line released
To turn Telephone Monitor Mode on:
1. Enter the Installer Code and press [6][AWAY].
Three beeps sound.
2. Press and hold [9] until two beeps sound.
A Test Report is sent.
Sequence
Event
1
2
3
4
System armed in AWAY Mode
Alarm in Zone 3
Alarm in Zone 4
System disarmed
To turn Telephone Monitor Mode off:
The alarm memory plays back in this order:
Enter the Installer Code and press [6][AWAY].
Two beeps sound.
Table 25: Event Memory Playback
You must exit from Telephone Monitor
Mode to resume normal operations.
Sequence
1
Indication
All indicators off
except MAINS
Event
System disarmed
2
3
4
Zone 4 and AWAY
indicators light
Zone 3 and AWAY
indicators light
AWAY indicator
lights
Alarm in Zone 4
Alarm in Zone 3
5.1.8
Walk Test Mode
Walk Test Mode allows you to test detection devices
to ensure they are functioning correctly. Before
activating Walk Test Mode, isolate any zones that are
not required for testing. Refer to Section 3.11 Isolating
Zones for more information. Use Locations 383 and
384 to enable Walk Test Mode Reports (refer to
Section 15.2).
System armed in
AWAY Mode
Each event is indicated by a beep and a lit indicator.
Resetting a disarmed 24-Hour Alarm is indicated by
a beep only.
To enter Walk Test Mode:
After the last event, three beeps sound to indicate the
end of playback. You can stop the replay at any time
by pressing [AWAY].
1. Enter the Installer Code and press [7][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash. The codepad beeps once per sec
when Walk Test Mode is active.
2. Unseal and seal the zones to be tested.
The codepad sounds one long beep and the horn
speaker sounds one short beep each time a zone
is sealed or unsealed.
If the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or
STAY Mode 2, the STAY indicator shows
the event memory playback. There is no
differentiation between STAY Mode 1
and STAY Mode 2.
If the control panel is powered down, the
memory of all events is saved.
3. Press [AWAY] to exit from this function.
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators are extinguished. The system returns
to the disarmed state.
If a ICP-CC488 Control Panel is
partitioned, only ten events per area play
back.
5.1.9
Event Memory Recall Mode
This function allows you to play back the last 40
system events that occurred. Event Memory Recall
Mode reports all alarms and each arming or
disarming of the system and helps with
troubleshooting system faults. The events are
displayed using the codepad indicators.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 5.0
System Functions
To arm or disarm both areas at the same time:
EN | 27
5.2
Master Code Functions
Enter your Master Code and press [0][AWAY]. Two
beeps sound and both areas are armed or disarmed
from AWAY Mode.
Master Code functions allow those users that have
the appropriate priority level to perform certain
supervisory level functions. You can use these
functions only when the system is disarmed.
5.2.2
Changing and Deleting User Codes
This function allows a Master Code holder to change
or delete a User Code.
The default Master Code (User Code 1) is
2580. It is possible to program multiple
Master Codes. Refer to Section 13.3
User Code Priority for more information.
When using a partitioned ICP-CC488 Control Panel,
the Master Code holder cannot add, change, or
delete User Codes unless the User Code is allocated
to the same area as the Master Code. Refer to Section
13.3 User Code Priority for more information.
1. Enter your Master Code and press [1][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash.
To access a Master Code function, enter the Master
Code and press the corresponding function digit and
the [AWAY] button. The Master Code functions are
listed in Table 26.
Table 26: Master Code Functions
2. Enter the number of the code (1 to 8) you want
to change and press [AWAY].
Function
0
Description
Arm or disarm both areas at the same time
(Refer to Section 5.2.1)
Add, change, and delete User
Codes/Remote Radio User Codes
(Sections 5.2.2 and 5.2.3)
Two beeps sound and the corresponding zone
indicator lights. Refer to Table 27 on page 28.
3. Enter the new code and press [AWAY].
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators are extinguished.
1
4. Repeat this procedure to change other User
Codes.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Change domestic phone numbers
(Section 5.2.4)
Change Telco Arm/Disarm Sequence
(Section 5.2.5)
Set zones for STAY Mode 2
(Section 5.2.6)
Turn outputs on and off
(Section 5.2.7)
Set the date and time
(Section 5.2.8)
Walk Test Mode
(Section 5.2.9)
Event Memory Recall Mode
(Section 5.2.10)
This function is automatically terminated if
you do not press a button within 60 sec
or if you press [AWAY].
One long beep indicates that the code
already exists or you entered an incorrect
user number.
Example
To program User Code number 2 as 4627, enter:
[2 5 8 0 1][AWAY][2][AWAY][4 6 2 7][AWAY]
To delete a User Code:
1. Enter your Master Code and press [1][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash.
5.2.1
Arm or Disarm Both Areas at the Same
Time
This Master Code function only operates with
partitioned ICP-CC488 systems and allows Master
Codes allocated to both Area 1 and Area 2 to arm or
disarm both areas at the same time.
2. Enter the number of the code (1 to 8) you want
to delete and press [AWAY].
Two beeps sound and the corresponding zone
indicator lights. Refer to Table 27.
3. Press [STAY] to delete the User Code.
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators are extinguished.
This feature allows a Master Code holder to arm or
disarm the system by pressing one extra button
rather than entering a code twice. You can use either
the CP5 Area Addressable Codepad (CP500A) or the
Master Partitioned Codepad (CP500P) with this
function. To enable this feature, select Option 2 in
Location 501 (refer to Section 19.3.2 Partitioning
Options 2).
4. Repeat this procedure to delete other User
Codes.
This function terminates automatically if
you do not press a button within 60 sec
or if you press [AWAY].
One long beep indicates that the code
already exists or that you entered an
incorrect user number.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 5.0
System Functions
EN | 28
4. Repeat this procedure to delete other remote
radio User Codes.
Table 27: User Numbers Displayed by the
Codepad Indicators
This function terminates automatically if
you do not press a button within 60 sec
or if you press [AWAY].
User
Number
Zone Indicators
1
X
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
One long beep indicates that the code
already exists or that you entered an
incorrect user number.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
X
X
X
X
Table 28: Remote Radio Numbers Displayed
by the Codepad Indicators
X
X
X
User
No
9
Zone Indicators
MAINS
Example
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Indicator
To delete user code number 3, enter:
[2 5 8 0 1][AWAY][3][AWAY][STAY]
X
X
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5.2.3
Changing and Deleting Remote Radio
User Codes
X
X
This function allows a Master Code holder to change
or delete a remote radio User Code.
X
X
To add or change a remote radio User Code:
X
1. Enter your Master Code and press [1][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash.
2. Enter the number of the code (9 to 16) you want
to change and press [AWAY].
5.2.4
Changing Domestic Phone Numbers
When the system is set up for domestic dialing, this
function allows the installer to view and program the
telephone numbers the system calls if an alarm
occurs. Refer to Section 9.0 Domestic Dialing on page
42 for more information.
Two beeps sound and the corresponding
codepad indicators light. Refer to Table 28 on
page 28.
To change domestic phone numbers:
3. Enter the nine-digit RF ID number found on the
back of the hand-held transmitter and press [#].
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators are extinguished.
4. Repeat this procedure to change other remote
radio User Codes.
1. Enter you Master Code and press [2][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash.
If no telephone numbers are programmed, they
are displayed one digit at a time using the remote
codepad indicators. Refer to Table 30 on page 29
for the indicators and their meanings.
If no telephone numbers are programmed, an
additional two beeps sound after entering this
mode. These two beeps normally sound after
you enter the last digit of the last phone number.
2. Enter the first phone number.
Each digit is displayed as you enter it.
3. If you are programming another phone number,
press [STAY][4] to separate the end of one
phone number and the beginning of the next.
If you are not programming other numbers, go
to Step 5.
This function is automatically terminated if
you do not press a button within 60 sec
or if you press [AWAY].
One long beep indicates that the code
already exists or you entered an incorrect
user number.
To delete a remote radio User Code:
1. Enter your Master Code and press [1][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash.
2. Enter the number of the code (9 to 16) you want
to delete and press [AWAY].
Two beeps sound and the corresponding
codepad indicators light. Refer to Table 28.
3. Press [STAY] to delete the User Code.
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators are extinguished.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to program another phone
number.
5. Press [AWAY] to exit from this mode.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 5.0
System Functions
EN | 29
Table 29: Domestic Dialing Digits
The examples provided for this feature
apply only to Australia.
Digit
Required
Number to
Program
Digit
Required
Number to
Program
•
•
Call Forward – Immediate On
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8
9
You can redirect calls to anywhere in Australia,
including mobiles, pagers, and answering
services. When this Call Forward option is
turned on, your telephone does not ring.
*
#
[STAY]1
[STAY]2
[STAY]3
[STAY]4
[STAY]5
Call Forward – No Answer
4 sec pause
break
15
If your telephone is not answered within 20 sec,
this feature redirects the incoming call to another
number anywhere in Australia. You can still
make outgoing calls.
Example
Telco Disarming Sequence
If you want to program two separate telephone
numbers (9672 1777 and 9672 1233), enter:
This option allows you to automatically disable the
call forward sequence when you disarm the system.
[2 5 8 0 2][AWAY][9 6 7 2 1 7 7 7][STAY]
[4 9 6 7 2 1 2 3 3][[AWAY]
Table 31: Telco Arm/Disarm Dialing Digits
To disable domestic dialing:
Enter your Master Code and press [2][AWAY]
[STAY][4][AWAY].
Digit
Required
Number to
Program
Digit
Required
Number to
Program
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8
9
Table 30: Codepad Indicators When Changing
Domestic Telephone Numbers
*
#
[STAY]1
[STAY]2
[STAY]3
[STAY]4
[STAY]5
Zone Indicators
MAINS
Indicator
X
4 sec pause
break
15
Digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
X
To program the telco arming sequence:
2
X
3
X
1. Enter your Master Code and press [3][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash.
4
X
5
X
2. Press [1][AWAY] to change the telco arming
sequence. Three beeps sound.
6
X
7
X
If a call forward sequence is already
programmed, the sequence is displayed one digit
at a time using the remote codepad indicators.
Refer to Table 30 on page 29 for the indicators
and their meanings.
If no call forward sequence is programmed, an
additional two beeps sound after entering this
mode. These two beeps normally sound after the
last digit of the call forward sequence is
displayed.
8
X
X
9
X
X
*
X
X
X
X
#
X
Pause
Break
X
X
5.2.5
Change Telco Arm/Disarm Sequence
This feature allows you to program the telco arm
sequence and telco disarm sequence. This feature is
available only if your telecommunication provider
has the call forward option available.
3. Enter the desired call forward sequence.
For example, program [* 6 1][phone number][#]
for the call forward – no answer sequence, or [* 2
1][phone number][#] for the call forward –
immediate sequence.
Telco Arm Sequence
This allows you to program the Call Forward –
Immediate On sequence or Call Forward – No
Answer sequence that automatically operates when
you arm the system in the AWAY Mode.
When you program a * in the telco arm
sequence, enter [STAY][1]. When you
program the # in the telco arm sequence,
enter [STAY][2].
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 5.0
System Functions
To set STAY Mode 2 zones:
EN | 30
4. Press [STAY][2][AWAY].
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the
disarmed state.
1. Enter your Master Code and press [4][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY indicator
flashes.
Example
2. Enter the number of the zone you want to
automatically isolate and press [STAY].
The corresponding zone indicator flashes.
3. Repeat Step 2 to select each zone.
If you want to automatically divert all unanswered
incoming calls to another telephone number (for
example, 9672 1777) when the system is armed in
AWAY Mode, enter:
As each zone is selected to be isolated,
the corresponding zone indicator flashes.
If you make a mistake, enter the incorrect
zone number and press [STAY]. This zone
is no longer selected to be isolated and
the zone indicator is extinguished.
[2 5 8 0 3][AWAY][1][AWAY][STAY]
[1 6 1 9 6 7 2 1 7 7 7][STAY][2][AWAY]
You can suspend the telco arming sequence at any
time. To disable the telco arming sequence:
Enter your Master Code and press [3][AWAY][1]
[AWAY][STAY][4][AWAY].
This function does not work on a
partitioned ICP-CC488 Control Panel.
To program the telco disarming sequence:
1. Enter your Master Code and press [3][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash.
2. Press [2][AWAY] to change the telco disarming
sequence.
4. Press [AWAY].
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the
disarmed state.
The indicators for the zones you selected and the
STAY indicator are extinguished.
Three beeps sound.
Example
If a telco disarming sequence is already
programmed, the sequence is displayed one digit
at a time using the remote codepad indicators.
Refer to Table 30 on page 29 for the indicators
and their meanings.
If you want to select zones 2, 5, and 6, enter:
[2 5 8 0 4][AWAY][2][STAY][5][STAY][6][STAY]
[AWAY]
You can disable all zones selected to be automatically
isolated for STAY Mode 2 at any time. To disable
STAY Mode 2 zones:
If no telco disarming sequence is programmed,
an additional two beeps sound after entering this
mode. These two beeps normally sound after the
last digit of the sequence is displayed.
3. Enter the desired call forward disable sequence.
For example, program [# 6 1 #] to disable the
call forward – no answer sequence, or [# 2 1 #]
Enter your Master Code and press [4][AWAY]
[AWAY].
5.2.7
Turning Outputs On/Off
If an output is programmed for remote operation,
you can turn the remote output on or off using this
Master Code function or remotely using the Alarm
Link Software.
to disable the call forward – immediate sequence.
\
When you program a # in the telco arm
sequence, enter [STAY][2].
To use this Master Code function, you must program
one or more of the outputs with these Output Event
Types:
4. Press [AWAY].
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the
disarmed state.
Output 1 = Output Event Type 2,8 (page 74)
Output 2 = Output Event Type 2,9 (page 74)
Output 3 = Output Event Type 2,10 (page 74)
You can suspend the telco disarming sequence at any
time. To disable the telco disarming sequence:
To turn an output on from the remote codepad:
Enter your Master Code and press [3][AWAY][2]
[AWAY][STAY][4][AWAY].
1. Enter your Master Code and press [5][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash.
5.2.6
Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones
This function allows the Master Code holder to select
the zones that are isolated automatically when the
system is armed in STAY Mode 2.
2. Enter the number of the output (1 to 3) and press
[AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the output turns on.
3. Repeat Step 2 to turn on another output.
4. Press [AWAY] to exit from this function.
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators are extinguished.
To arm the system in STAY Mode 2, press and hold
[0] until two beeps sound. Refer to Section 5.4.3 or
Section 3.5 Arming The System in STAY Mode 2 for more
information.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 5.0
System Functions
EN | 31
Example
5.2.9
Walk Test Mode
If Output 2 is programmed as 291000 in Locations
443 to 448, the Master Code holder can turn on this
output by entering:
Walk Test Mode allows you to test detection devices
to ensure that they are functioning correctly. Before
activating Walk Test Mode, isolate any zones that are
not required for testing. Refer to Section 3.11 Isolating
Zones for more information. Use Locations 383 and
384 to enable Walk Test Mode Reports (refer to
Section 15.2).
[2 5 8 0 5][AWAY][2][AWAY][AWAY]
To turn an output off from the remote codepad:
1. Enter your Master Code and press [5][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash.
2. Enter the number of the output (1 to 3) and press
[STAY].
Two beeps sound and the output turns off.
3. Repeat Step 2 to turn off another output.
4. Press [AWAY] button to exit from this function.
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators are extinguished.
To enter Walk Test Mode:
1. Enter your Master Code and press [7][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash. The codepad beeps once per sec
when Walk Test Mode is active.
2. Unseal and seal the zones to be tested.
The codepad sounds one long beep and the horn
speaker sounds one short beep each time a zone
is sealed or unsealed.
3. Press [AWAY] to exit from this function.
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators are extinguished. The system returns
to the disarmed state.
Example
If Output 2 is programmed as 291000 in Locations
442 to 447, the Master Code holder can turn off this
output by entering:
[2 5 8 0 5][AWAY][2][STAY][AWAY]
5.2.10
Event Non-volatile Memory Recall Mode
This function allows you to play back the last 40
system events that occurred. Event Non-volatile
Memory Recall Mode reports all alarms and each
arming or disarming of the system and helps with
troubleshooting system faults. The events are shown
using the codepad indicators. The event memory is
not lost even with the power supply off.
5.2.8
Setting the Date and Time
Use this function when the date and time must be
changed or if the system was powered down.
If the date and time is not set, the date and time fault
appears only when the Auto Arming Time is
programmed in Locations 482 to 485 (refer to Section
17.12 Auto Arming Time on page 79), or when you
enter Fault Analysis Mode by holding down [5].
To enter Event Memory Recall Mode:
Enter your Master Code and press [8][AWAY].
Three beeps sound. The events are played back by
the codepad indicators in reverse chronological
order.
To set the new date and time:
1. Enter your Master Code and press [6][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash.
2. Enter the day, month, year, hour, and minute in
DD, MM, YY, HH, MM format (where DD is
the day of the month, MM is the month of the
year, YY is the year, HH is the hour of the day,
and MM is the minute of the day) and press
[AWAY].
Example
If the events occurred in the following order:
Table 32: Event Sequence
Sequence
Event
Use 24:00 hour format when programming the
hour of the day.
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators are extinguished. If a long beep
sounds, an error occurred when you entered the
date and time.
1
2
3
4
System armed in AWAY Mode
Alarm in Zone 3
Alarm in Zone 4
System disarmed
Example
To set the date and time for 1st January 2009 at
10:30 PM, enter:
[2 5 8 0 6][AWAY][0 1 0 1 0 9 2 2 3 0][AWAY]
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 5.0
System Functions
EN | 32
5.4.1
Arm the System in AWAY Mode
The alarm memory plays back in this order:
Holding down [#] until two beeps sound arms the
system in AWAY Mode. This hold-down function
operates only if you select Option 2 in Location 497
(refer to Section 18.6 Consumer Options 2 on page 83).
Table 33: Event Memory Playback
Sequence
Indication
Event
1
All indicators off
except MAINS
Zone 4 and AWAY
indicators light
Zone 3 and AWAY
indicators light
AWAY indicator
lights
System disarmed
This hold down function does not work if
you are using an ICP-CP5 Master
Partitioned codepad (CP500P) with a
partitioned ICP-CC488 Control Panel.
2
3
4
Alarm in Zone 4
Alarm in Zone 3
If you are using an ICP-CP5 Area
Addressable Codepad (ICP-CP500A)
with a partitioned ICP-CC488 Control
Panel, this function arms the
System armed in
AWAY Mode
Each event is indicated by a beep and a lit indicator.
Resetting a disarmed 24-Hour Alarm is indicated by
a beep only.
corresponding area in AWAY Mode.
5.4.2
Arm the System in STAY Mode 1
After the last event, three beeps sound to indicate the
end of playback. You can stop the replay at any time
by pressing [AWAY].
Holding down [*] until two beeps sound arms the
system in STAY Mode 1. This hold-down function
operates only if you select Option 2 in Location 497
(refer to Section 18.6 Consumer Options 2 on page 83).
If the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or
STAY Mode 2, the STAY indicator shows
the event memory playback. There is no
differentiation between STAY Mode 1
and STAY Mode 2.
If there was no alarm during the armed cycle,
holding down [*] a sec time disarms the system from
STAY Mode 1. To enable single button disarming
from STAY Mode 1 using this hold-down function,
select Option 4 in Location 497.
If the control panel is powered down, the
memory of all events is saved.
If an alarm occurred or entry warning was activated,
a valid User Code is required to disarm the system.
If an ICP-CC488 Control Panel is
partitioned, only ten events per area play
back.
Refer to Section 14.3.7 Zone Options 2 on page 63 for
information on programming each zone to be
automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1.
5.3
5.3.1
User Code Functions
This hold-down function does not work if
you are using an ICP-CP5 Master
Partitioned Codepad (ICP-CP500P) with
a partitioned ICP-CC488 Control Panel.
Arm or Disarm Both Areas at the Same
Time
This User Code function operates only with
partitioned ICP-CC488 systems and allows User
Codes allocated to both Area 1 and Area 2 to arm or
disarm both areas at the same time.
If you are using an ICP-CP5 Area
Addressable Codepad (ICP-CP500A)
with a partitioned ICP-CC488 Control
Panel, this function arms the
This feature allows a user to arm or disarm the
system by pressing one extra button rather than
entering a code twice. You can use either the CP5
Area Addressable Codepad (ICP-CP500A) or the
Master Partitioned Codepad (ICP-CP500P) with this
function. To enable this feature, select Option 2 in
Location 501 (refer to Section 19.3.2 Partitioning
Options 2).
corresponding area in STAY Mode1.
5.4.3
Arm the System in STAY Mode 2
Holding down [0] until two beeps sound arms the
system in STAY Mode 2. This hold-down function
operates only if you select Option 2 in Location 497
(refer to Section 18.6 Consumer Options 2 on page 83).
If no alarm occurred during the armed cycle, holding
down [0] a sec time disarms the system from STAY
Mode 2. To enable single button disarming from
STAY Mode 2 using this hold-down function, select
Option 4 in Location 497.
To arm or disarm both areas at the same time:
Enter your User Code and press [0][AWAY].
Two beeps sound and both areas are armed or
disarmed from AWAY Mode.
If an alarm occurred or entry warning was activated,
a valid User Code is required to disarm the system.
5.4
Hold-Down Functions
Hold-down functions allow easy activation of specific
operations. When you hold down a button for 2 sec,
two beeps sound and the corresponding function
operates. The hold-down functions are listed below.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 5.0
System Functions
EN | 33
For more information, refer to Section 5.1.5 Setting
STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 25 (using the Installer
Code function) or Section 5.2.6 Setting STAY Mode 2
Zones on page 25 (using the Master Code function).
To determine the type of fault:
Press and hold [5] until two beeps sound.
The STAY, AWAY, and FAULT indicators flash.
One or more zone indicators (1 to 8) light to indicate
the type of fault that occurred. Refer to Table 15 on
page 20.
STAY Mode 2 is not available on
partitioned ICP-CC488 Control Panels.
To exit from Fault Analysis Mode:
Press [AWAY].
The STAY and AWAY indicators are extinguished
and the system returns to the disarmed state.
5.4.4
Horn Speaker Test
Holding down [1] until two beeps sound activates the
horn speaker for a 2-sec burst. No other sounding
device operates during this mode.
5.4.9
Initiate a Modem Call
Holding down [6] until two beeps sound forces the
control panel to dial the callback telephone number
programmed in Locations 159 to 174 (refer to Section
11.9 Call Back Telephone Number on page 51) in an
attempt to connect to the installer’s remote computer.
5.4.5
Bell Test
Holding down [2] until two beeps sound activates the
internal screamers for a 2-sec burst. No other
sounding device operates during this mode.
If the SS914 Satellite Siren (EDMSAT) is connected
to the control panel, this function tests both the horn
speaker and the strobe connected to the satellite siren
for a 2-sec burst.
The remote computer must be running the CC816
Alarm Link Software and must be set to Waiting for
an Incoming Call. If no callback telephone number is
programmed, holding down [6] has no effect.
5.4.6
Strobe Test
5.4.10
Reset Latching Outputs
Holding down [3] operates the strobe. No other
device operates during this mode.
Holding down [7] until two beeps sound resets any
output that is programmed to remain on after it is
activated.
If the SS914 Satellite Siren (EDMSAT) is connected
to the control panel, this function also tests the strobe
on the satellite siren.
The output must be programmed with a latching
polarity. Refer to Section 16.3 Output Polarity on page
76 for more information.
To turn the strobe test on:
Press and hold [3] until three beeps sound.
The strobe flashes.
5.4.11
Change the Codepad Buzzer Tone
Holding down [8] down continuously changes the
tone of the buzzer in the remote codepad. There are
50 different tones from 1500 Hz to 5000 Hz. In an
installation with multiple codepads, you can set a
different tone for each codepad.
To turn the strobe test off:
Press and hold [3] until two beeps sound.
The strobe stops flashing.
5.4.7
Turning Day Alarm On and Off
To change the buzzer tone:
Holding down [4] turns Day Alarm on or off. If you
want the STAY indicator to indicate the status of Day
Alarm operation (enabled or disabled), select Option
8 in Location 484 (refer to Section 18.5 Consumer
Options 1 on page 82). When this option is selected,
the STAY indicator flashes once every 3 sec when
Day Alarm is active.
1. Press and hold [8] continuously.
The tone of the buzzer increases in pitch.
2. Release [8] button when you hear the desired
tone.
Every time the system is powered down,
you must reset each codepad to its
individual tone using this function.
To turn Day Alarm on:
Press and hold [4] until three beeps sound.
To turn Day Alarm off:
On partitioned ICP-CC488 Control Panels, this hold-
down function also indicates the area to which the
codepad belongs.
Press and hold [4] until two beeps sound.
5.4.8
Fault Analysis Mode
Several system faults can be detected by the control
panel. When any of these faults are present, the
FAULT indicator flashes and the codepad beeps
once per min. Refer to Section 3.12 Fault Analysis Mode
on page 18 for more information on each fault type.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 6.0
Remote Arming by Telephone
EN | 34
To determine the area to which the codepad
belongs:
When both Remote Arming and
Upload/Download are selected, the
1. Press and hold [8] until two beeps sound.
A zone indicator lights to show the area to which
the codepad belongs.
Zone 1 = Area 1 codepad
Zone 2 = Area 2 codepad
Zone 7 = Master Partitioned Codepad
If no zone indicator lights, the codepad is set up
incorrectly or an incorrect codepad is used.
2. Press [AWAY] to exit from this mode.
control panel answers the call expecting
the remote computer. When this occurs,
modem negotiating tones sound rather
than the remote arming jingle.
Using this method with a partitioned
ICP-CC488 Control Panel arms both
areas in AWAY Mode. Arming individual
areas is not available with this method.
5.4.12
Send Test Report
7.0 Programming
The control panel programming options are stored in
a non-volatile EPROM. This memory holds all
relevant configuration and user-specific data even
after a total power loss.
Holding down [9] until two beeps sound transmits a
Test Report (Contact ID Event Code 602) to test the
dialing and reporting capabilities of the system
without activating the sirens.
Because the data retention time is up to ten years
without power, no reprogramming is required after
powering down the control panel.
6.0 Remote Arming by
Telephone
This feature allows you to arm your system from any
remote location by telephone. For obvious security
reasons, you cannot disarm the system using this
method. A touch-tone telephone is required to use
this feature.
You can change data as many times as required
without additional specialized equipment. The
memory is organized in locations, each of which
holds the data for a specific function.
The maximum value you can program into
any location is 15.
To remotely arm your system by telephone:
1. Call the telephone number to which your control
panel is connected.
In general, the entire programming sequence consists
of selecting the required location, and then entering
or changing the current data. Repeat this procedure
until you program all required data. The factory
default settings are selected for reporting to the
monitoring station in Contact ID format.
When the control panel answers the incoming
call, a short jingle sounds.
If you hear several strange sounding tones
when the control panel answers the
incoming call, the system is programmed
for remote programming functions. Wait
for a pause in the tones and follow Step 2
to arm the system remotely.
The Installer Code provides access only to the
Installer’s Programming Mode and does not allow
you to arm and disarm the system. You cannot enter
Installer’s Programming Mode when the system is
armed, or at any time during siren run time.
2. Hold the phone controller to the telephone’s
mouthpiece and press and hold the button on the
side of the unit for 3 sec.
You can program the ICP-CC488 Control Panel
using any of these devices:
You can alternatively press and hold [*] on the
touch-tone telephone for 3 sec to arm the system.
Two beeps sound to indicate that the system is
armed in AWAY Mode.
•
•
Remote codepad
CC816 Alarm Link Upload/Download Software
3. Hang up the telephone.
The system remains armed.
7.1
Programming with the Remote
Codepad
If the control panel does not answer the call, the
system might be armed already, remote functions are
not enabled, or the ring count is set to 0. To enable
remote arming by telephone, select Option 2 in
Location 177 (refer to Section 12.1 Dialer Options 1 on
page 52). To set the number of rings before the
control panel answers, refer to Section 11.10 Ring
Count on page 51.
To program the control panel using the remote
codepad, the system must be disarmed with no alarm
memory present.
To access Installer’s Programming Mode:
Enter the four-digit Installer Code (the factory default
is 1234) and press [AWAY].
Two beeps sound and both the AWAY and the
STAY indicators flash simultaneously to indicate that
you entered Installer’s Programming Mode.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 7.0
Programming
EN | 35
When you enter Installer’s Programming Mode, you
are automatically positioned at Location 000, the first
digit of the Primary Telephone Number for
Receiver 1. The codepad indicators show the current
data stored in this location.
Refer to Section 7.4 Installer’s Programming Commands
on page 36 for more information about using
Installer’s Programming Mode.
7.2
Programming with the
Programming Key
The CC891 Programming Key allows you to store or
copy programming information from your control
panel. After storing information in the programming
key, you can easily program other ICP-CC488
Control Panels with the same programming data.
You can also use the programming key to back up
existing information.
Table 34: Codepad Indicators
Data
Value
0
Zone Indicators
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MAINS
1
X
2
X
If you connect the programming key to the control
panel when it is disarmed, the key automatically
initiates a data transfer to the control panel’s
memory.
3
X
4
X
5
X
6
X
If you have a new programming key, enter Installer’s
Programming Mode, program the system as required,
and then connect the programming key to the
control panel.
7
X
8
X
X
9
X
X
10
11
12
13
14
15
X
X
X
X
X
X
To connect the programming key:
Locate the socket labeled PROGRAMMING KEY at
the top of the printed circuit board (PCB) next to the
Auxiliary Module socket (refer to Figure 24 on page
96). Observe the triangular markings on the PCB and
align them with the markings on the programming
key.
X
X
X
X
To move to a different programming location:
To copy data from the control panel data to the
programming key:
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and
press [#] to enter Installer’s Programming Mode.
2. Enter [9 6 2 #].
Enter the location number and press [AWAY].
For example, press [3 4][AWAY] to automatically
step you to the beginning of the Subscriber ID
Number for Receiver 1. The data stored in the new
location appears.
Refer to Section 7.4.4 Command 962 – Copy the
Control Panel Memory to the Programming Key on
page 37 for more information.
To move to the next location:
Press [AWAY].
For example, if you are currently positioned at
Location 034, press [AWAY] to step to Location 035.
3. Enter [9 6 0 #] to exit from Installer’s
Programming Mode.
To move to the previous location:
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the
disarmed state. Before removing the
Press [STAY].
programming key, wait 2 sec for the activity
LED to return to its normal state. The
programming key becomes your standard data
pattern for future control panel programming.
For example, if you are positioned at Location 035,
press [STAY] to step back to Location 034.
To change data in the current location:
Enter the new value (0 to 15) and press [STAY].
The data is stored and you remain positioned at the
same location. The new value is displayed using the
codepad indicators (for example, if you enter [1 4]
and press [STAY], the Zone 4 and MAINS indicators
are lit).
If you enter Installer’s Programming Mode, insert a
programming key, and then change the data in any
location, the data for both the programming key and
the control panel is changed at the same time.
To exit from Installer’s Programming Mode:
Enter command [9 6 0] and press [AWAY].
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators are extinguished. The system returns to the
disarmed state and is now ready for use.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 7.0
Programming
EN | 36
If you do not enter Installer’s Programming
Table 36: Installer’s Programming Mode
Commands
Mode first, connecting the CC891
Programming Key to the control panel
when the programming key memory is
blank corrupts the control panel’s
Command Function
memory. If this occurs, you must return
the control panel to Bosch Security
Systems, Inc. to unlock the control panel’s
memory. A service fee will be charged.
959
960
961
962
Test the programming key
Refer to Section 7.4.1.
Exit from Installer’s Programming Mode
Refer to Section 7.4.2.
Reset the control panel to factory defaults
Refer to Section 7.4.3.
Copy the control panel memory to the
programming key
Refer to Section 7.4.4.
Copy the programming key data to the
control panel memory
Refer to Section 7.4.5.
Erase the programming key
Refer to Section 7.4.6.
Set up domestic dialing format
Refer to Section 7.4.7.
Enable/disable the automatic stepping of
locations during programming
Refer to Section 7.4.8.
7.3
Programming Option Bits
When programming these locations, each location
has four options. You can select one, two, three, or
all four options for each location, but you can
program only one value for the location. Calculate
this value by adding the option bit numbers together.
963
Example
964
965
966
If you want to select Options 1, 2, and 4 for Location
177, add the numbers and program the sum. In this
example, program a 7 in the location (1 + 2 + 4 = 7).
Table 35: Programming Option Bits Example
999
Display the software version number or
control panel type
Option Description
1
2
4
Allow dialer reporting functions
Enable remote arming by telephone
Enable answering machine bypass only when
armed
Enabled = Use Bell 103 for FSK format
Disabled = CCITT V21 format
Refer to Section 7.4.9.
7.4.1
Command 959 – Test the Programming
Key
This command initiates a test of the programming
key. You can use the CC891 Programming Key only
with the ICP-CC488 Control Panel.
8
7.4
Installer’s Programming
Commands
The programming key test is non-destructive, and
any data in the programming key remains after the
test is completed. One long beep indicates that the
programming key test failed. Two beeps indicates a
successful test.
You can use ten commands in Installer’s
Programming Mode. To issue the command, enter
the command number and press [#].
If you remove the programming key before the test is
finished, the programming key data becomes corrupt.
Do not remove the programming key while the
activity LED is lit or pulsing rapidly.
To test the programming key:
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and
press [#] to enter Installer’s Programming Mode.
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash on the remote codepad to
indicate you entered Installer’s Programming
Mode. The remote codepad displays the data
stored in Location 000.
2. Connect the programming key to the
PROGRAMMING KEY pins (next to the
Auxiliary Module socket) at the top of the
control panel printed circuit board.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 7.0
Programming
EN | 37
3. Enter [9 5 9 #].
To copy the control panel memory to the
programming key:
Two beeps sound after a successful test of the
programming key. A long beep indicates that the
programming key data is corrupt and must be
erased to clear the corrupt data. Refer to Section
7.4.6 on page 38 for more information.
4. Enter [9 6 0 #] to exit from Installer’s
Programming Mode.
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and
press [#] to enter Installer’s Programming Mode.
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash on the remote codepad to
indicate you entered Installer’s Programming
Mode. The remote codepad displays the data
stored in Location 000.
2. Connect the programming key to the
PROGRAMMING KEY pins (next to the
Auxiliary Module socket) at the top of the
control panel found printed circuit board.
3. Enter [9 6 2 #].
Two beeps sound. The STAY and AWAY
indicators are extinguished on the remote
codepad and the system returns to the disarmed
state.
5. Remove the programming key from the control
panel.
Failure to exit from Installer’s Programming
Mode before removing the programming key
can corrupt the data in the programming key.
Two beeps sound after the control panel
memory is successfully copied to the
programming key. A long beep indicates that the
programming key is corrupt and must be erased
to clear the corrupt data. Refer to Section 7.4.6
Command 964 – Erase the Programming Key on page
38 for more information.
7.4.2
Command 960 – Exit from Installer's
Programming Mode
This command exits from Installer’s Programming
Mode. You can exit from Installer’s Programming
Mode from any location.
4. Enter command [9 6 0 #] to exit from Installer’s
Programming Mode.
To exit from Installer’s Programming Mode:
The STAY and AWAY indicators are
extinguished on the remote codepad to indicate
the system is disarmed.
Enter [9 6 0 #].
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the
disarmed state. When using the remote codepad, the
STAY and AWAY indicators are extinguished.
5. Remove the programming key from the control
panel.
Failure to exit from Installer’s Programming
Mode before removing the programming key
can corrupt the programming key.
7.4.3
Command 961 – Reset the Control
Panel to Factory Default Settings
This command resets the control panel to factory
default values. Default values are listed throughout
this guide and in the programming sheets in
7.4.5
Command 963 – Copy the
Programming Key to the Control Panel
Section 25.0
Programming Sheets on page 101. You
This command copies data from the programming
key to the control panel. You can use the CC891
Programming Key only with the ICP-CC488 Control
Panel.
can reset the control panel from any location.
To reset the control panel to factory defaults:
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and
press [#] to enter Installer’s Programming Mode.
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash on the remote codepad to
indicate that you entered Installer’s
Programming Mode. The remote codepad
displays the data stored in Location 000.
2. Enter [9 6 1 #].
To copy the programming key memory to the
control panel:
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and
press [#] to enter Installer’s Programming Mode.
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash on the remote codepad to
indicate you entered Installer’s Programming
Mode. The remote codepad displays the data
stored in Location 000.
Two beeps sound and the system is reset to the
factory default values.
2. Connect the programming key to the
PROGRAMMING KEY pins (next to the
Auxiliary Module socket) at the top of the
control panel printed circuit board.
7.4.4
Command 962 – Copy the Control
Panel Memory to the Programming Key
This command copies the control panel memory to
the programming key. You can only use the CC891
Programming Key with the ICP-CC488 Control
Panel.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 7.0
Programming
To set up domestic dialing format:
EN | 38
3. Enter [9 6 3 #].
Two beeps sound after the programming key’s
data is successfully copied to the control panel. A
long beep indicates that the programming key is
corrupt and must be erased to clear the corrupt
data. Refer to Section 7.4.6 Command 964 – Erase
the Programming Key on page 38 for more
information.
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and
press [#] to enter Installer’s Programming Mode.
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash on the remote codepad to
indicate you entered Installer’s Programming
Mode. The remote codepad displays the data
stored in Location 000.
4. Enter [9 6 0 #] to exit from Installer’s
Programming Mode.
2. Enter [9 6 5 #].
The command automatically sets Receiver 1 to
domestic reporting and sets the locations shown
in bold in Table 37 on page 39 for Receiver 2
only. No other locations are changed when you
issue command 965.
The STAY and AWAY indicators are
extinguished on the remote codepad to indicate
the system is disarmed.
5. Remove the programming key from the control
panel.
All domestic telephone numbers are stored in
Locations 550 to 597. For more information, refer to
Section 9.2 Setting Up and Programming Domestic
Reporting on page 43.
Failure to exit from Installer’s Programming
Mode before removing the programming key
can corrupt the programming key.
7.4.6
Command 964 – Erase the
Programming Key
As shown in Table 37 on page 39, the transmission
format is automatically set for domestic dialing and
the Subscriber ID Number set for one identification
beep. All reports, except Zone Status reporting and
System Status reporting, are allocated to Receiver 1
for domestic dialing.
This command erases all data from the programming
key. You can only use the CC891 Programming Key
with the ICP-CC488 Control Panel.
To erase the programming key:
Zone Status Reports including Zone Bypass, Zone
Trouble, Sensor Watch, and Alarm Restore codes,
and System Status Reports including AUX Power
Supply Fail, AC Fail, Low Battery, and Access
Denied Reports are allocated to Receiver 2 and do
not report unless Receiver 2 is also set up to report.
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and
press [#] to enter Installer’s Programming Mode.
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash on the remote codepad to
indicate you entered Installer’s Programming
Mode. The remote codepad displays the data
stored in Location 000.
2. Connect the programming key to the
PROGRAMMING KEY pins (next to the
Auxiliary Module socket) at the top of the
control panel found printed circuit board.
3. Enter [9 6 4 #].
7.4.8
Command 966 – Enable/Disable the
Automatic Stepping of Locations
This command allows the automatic stepping of
locations when programming in Installer’s
Programming Mode.
Programming with the remote codepad provides no
visual indication that Auto Step Mode is enabled.
Two beeps sound after the data is deleted.
4. Enter [9 6 0 #] to exit from Installer’s
Programming Mode.
To enable the automatic stepping of locations:
The STAY and AWAY indicators are
extinguished on the remote codepad to indicate
the system is disarmed.
1. Enter the Installer Code (default = 1234) and
press [#] to enter Installer’s Programming Mode.
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash on the remote codepad to
indicate you entered Installer’s Programming
Mode. The remote codepad displays the data
stored in Location 000.
5. Remove the programming key from the control
panel.
Failure to exit from Installer’s Programming
Mode before removing the programming key
can corrupt the programming key.
2. Enter [9 6 6 #].
Two beeps sound.
To disable the automatic stepping of locations:
7.4.7
Command 965 – Set Up Domestic
Dialing Format
Enter [9 6 6 #].
Two beeps sound.
Command 965 simplifies the setup of the domestic
dialing format to a one-step operation. Refer to
Section 9.0 Domestic Dialing on page 42 for more
information.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 7.0
Programming
Press [0 #].
EN | 39
Example (Auto Step Enabled)
You are positioned at Location 000 (the Primary
Telephone Number for Receiver 1).
To enter the Primary Telephone Number 02 (pause)
9672 1055 when auto step is enabled:
1. Press [0 #].
You are positioned at Location 000 (the Primary
Telephone Number for Receiver 1).
2. Program the number by pressing:
[10 * 2 * 13 * 9 * 6 * 7 * 2 * 1 * 10 * 5 * 5 * 0*]
To program the number, press:
[10 * # 2 * # 13 * # 9 * # 6 * # 7 * # 2 * # 1 * # 10 *
# 5 * # 5 * # 0 *]
Example (Auto Step Disabled)
To enter the Primary Telephone Number 02 (pause)
9672 1055 when auto step is disabled:
Table 37: Command 965 Defaults
Location
032
033
Description
Handshake Tone for Receiver 1
Transmission Format
Default Value
1
4
Setting
(Handshake Tone)
(Domestic)
034 and 039 Subscriber ID Number
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1
(1 Beep)
392
401 to 402
403
424 to 426
427
428 to 434
435
Zone Status Reporting Options
Open/Close Reports
Open/Close Reporting Options
System Status – Access Denied
System Status Reporting Options
Test Report Time
2
(Receiver 2 only)
(Open/Close Reports)
(Receiver 2 only)
(Access Denied)
(Receiver 2 only)
(Test Reports)
(Receiver 1 only)
11, 12
2
6, 7, 12
2
0, 0, 0, 0, 7, 1, 0
1
Test Reporting Dialer Options
4. Enter [9 6 0 #] to exit from Installer's
Programming Mode.
7.4.9
Command 999 – Display the Panel
Type or Software Version Number
Two sound and the system returns to the
disarmed state.
If you are using the remote codepad, the STAY
and AWAY indicators are extinguished to
indicate the system is disarmed.
When using the remote codepad, this command
displays the version of the control panel. Visually
determining which control panel your printed circuit
board (PCB) is set to is difficult because various
control panels use the same PCB.
7.5
Location
Disable Factory Defaults
The codepad displays 8 to indicate the control panel
software, ICP-CC488.
900
0
Default
To display the control panel type or software
version number:
This feature prevents the control panel from
manually restoring the default settings by the default
button and prevents the use of a programming key to
automatically download to the control panel when
the system is disarmed.
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and
press [#] to enter Installer’s Programming Mode.
If you are using the remote codepad, the STAY
and AWAY indicators flash to indicate you
entered Installer’s Programming Mode.
2. Enter [9 9 9 #].
Enter the default setting of 0 for Location 900 to
restore the control panel to its default settings. Enter
15 for Location 900 to restrict the ability to restore
the control panel to its default settings and to require
the Installer Code for future control panel
programming.
Two beeps sound.
If you are using the remote codepad, the
codepad lights a zone indicator corresponding to
the control panel type. Refer to Section 2.0
Codepad Indicators on page 10 for more
information.
If the Installer Code is unknown, you must restore
the control panel to your Bosch distributor for
exchange. A nominal fee applies for this service.
3. Press [#] to exit from this command and return
to the Installer’s Programming Mode.
The use of this feature is not
recommended.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 8.0
Alarm Link Software
EN | 40
If you are required to disable the ability restore the
control panel to its default settings, a special
procedure eliminates the possibility of accidentally
setting this option. You must hold down the default
button on the printed circuit board (PCB) when
programming this location.
5. Enter [2 5 8 0 *] to disarm the system using the
default Master Code.
The control panel default factory settings are
restored.
If the option to restore the default control
panel settings is disabled using Location
900:
To prevent manually restoring the default
control panel settings:
•
The dialer seize relay (RL2) clicks
four times. You must return the
control panel to Bosch Security
Systems, Inc. for exchange. If the
Installer Code is unknown, a service
fee is charged to unlock the control
panel’s memory
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and
press [#] to enter Installer’s Programming Mode.
Two beeps sound and the remote codepad
displays the data programmed in Location 000.
If you are using the remote codepad, the STAY
and AWAY indicators flash to indicate you
entered Installer’s Programming Mode.
2. Enter [9 0 0 #] to move to Location 900.
3. Press and hold the default button.
The default button is located at the top of the
PCB next to the PROGRAMMING KEY socket.
4. Enter [1 5 *] to program 15 into Location 900.
5. Release the default button.
•
•
When programmed to disable the
default control panel setting, you
cannot use the command [961#] to
retrieve the programming data.
The use of this feature is not
recommended.
6. Enter [9 6 0 #] to exit from Installer’s
Programming Mode.
8.0 Alarm Link Software
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the
disarmed state.
If you are using a remote codepad, the STAY
and AWAY indicators are extinguished to
indicate that the system is disarmed.
You can program or control the ICP-CC488 Control
Panel remotely using an IBM or compatible personal
computer and the CC816 Alarm Link Software. This
software allows you to change your customer’s
control panel without leaving your office, which
improves customer service and saves you time and
money. For locations where a control panel is
installed hundreds of kilometers from your office, the
Upload/Download feature is invaluable.
If Location 900 is not programmed as 15, do one of
the following procedures to restore the default
control panel settings.
To default the control panel settings using the
Installer Code:
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and
press [#] to enter Installer’s Programming Mode.
Two beeps sound. The STAY and AWAY
indicators flash to indicate you entered Installer’s
Programming Mode.
When selecting the control panel type during the
setup of a new customer database in the Alarm Link
Software, the software version number is ICP-CC488
V1.0X and the panel type is I488.
When you add a new customer in the Alarm Link
Software, the Subscriber ID Number and the Installer
Code must match the values programmed in the
control panel for synchronization during connection
to the control panel. If these two locations do not
match those of the control panel, the computer and
the control panel cannot be synchronized.
2. Enter [9 6 1 #].
Two beeps sound after the default control panel
settings are restored.
3. Enter [9 6 0 #].
Two beeps sound. The STAY and AWAY
indicators stop flashing and the system returns to
the disarmed state.
The control panel default factory settings are
restored.
8.1
Remote Connect
The remote connect feature allows you to establish a
connection through the telephone network from your
IBM or compatible computer to the ICP-CC488
Control Panel. This software allows you to offer
faster service to your clients.
To restore the default control panel settings using
the default button:
1. Disconnect the AC MAINS supply and the
backup battery from the control panel.
2. Press and hold the default button.
The default button is located at the top of the
PCB next to the PROGRAMMING KEY socket.
3. Reconnect the AC MAINS supply to the control
panel.
8.1.1
Remote Connection with Customer
Control
If you want to configure the control panel so that a
remote connection can be established only when the
client initiates it through the remote codepad,
program the following information:
4. Wait 3 to 5 sec and release the default button.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 8.0
Alarm Link Software
8.1.3
EN | 41
Remote Connection with Callback
Verification
•
•
Program the Call Back Telephone Number in
Locations 159 to 174 (refer to Section 11.9 on
page 51).
Remote connect with callback verification offers the
highest degree of data security by incorporating a
two-level security check.
Disable Option 1 in Location 180 (refer to Section
8.2 Alarm Link Options on page 41).
The first level is provided because the Installer Code
and the Subscriber ID Number must match those of
the control panel. The sec level of security exists
because the control panel calls the programmed
callback telephone number to establish the valid
connection.
The control panel is set so the client controls when a
remote connection is established.
To dial the remote computer:
Press and hold [6] until two beeps sound on the
remote codepad.
8.1.2
Remote Connection without Callback
Verification
To program the control panel for remote
connection with callback verification:
Remote connect without callback verification is
useful if you must perform Upload/Download
functions from multiple locations.
1. Program the Call Back Telephone Number in
Locations 159 to 174 (refer to Section 11.9 on
page 51).
2. Select Options 1 and 2 in Location 180 (refer to
Section 8.2 Alarm Link Options on page 41).
There are two methods to disable callback
verification. Using this feature reduces the security of
the control panel.
8.1.4
Direct Connection
The direct connect feature gives the installer a simple
method to program the ICP-CC488 Control Panel
using a portable computer. Because telephone lines
and modems are not required, programming of the
control panel is easily completed in min.
Method One
Method one allows you to call the control panel from
any remote location without the control panel calling
back to the computer to establish a link. When using
this method, the customer cannot initiate a modem
call by holding down [6].
To use the direct connect feature, connect the CC808
Direct Link Cable between the correct serial port on
your IBM or compatible computer and the auxiliary
module socket on the control panel.
To program method one:
1. Program Locations 159 to 174 for the Call Back
Telephone Number to 0 (refer to Section 11.9 on
page 51).
2. Select Option 1 and disable Option 2 in Location
180 (refer to Section 8.2 Alarm Link Options on
page 41).
To use the direct connect feature, it is not necessary
to select Option 1 Location 180. The direct connect
feature ignores this option.
8.2
Alarm Link Options
The control panel allows a connection of the first call
without calling the remote computer back.
180
Location
1
2
4
8
Enable upload/download using Alarm Link
Enable Alarm Link call back
Terminate Alarm Link connection on alarm
Reserved
Method Two
Method two allows you to program a callback
telephone number so that the customer can still
initiate a modem call when required. When you call
the control panel from a remote location using the
computer, the control panel does not call back the
remote computer to establish a link.
When programming these locations, you can select
any of four options. You can select any combination
of the options by programming a single value.
Calculate this value by adding the option bit
numbers together. Refer to Section 7.3 Programming
Option Bits on page 36 for more information.
To program method two:
1. Program the Call Back Telephone Number in
Locations 159 to 174 (refer to Section 11.9 on
page 51).
2. Select Option 1 and disable Option 2 in Location
180 (refer to Section 8.2 Alarm Link Options on
page 41).
1 – Enable Upload/Download Using Alarm Link
Select this option to use the CC816 Alarm Link
Software to program the control panel remotely. The
control panel does not respond to the Alarm Link
Software if this option is not selected. Refer to Section
8.0 Alarm Link Software on page 40 for more
information.
The control panel allows a connection of the first call
without calling back the remote computer to make
contact. It allows the customer to initiate a modem
call by holding down [6].
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 9.0
Domestic Dialing
EN | 42
2 – Enable Alarm Link Call Back
9.1
Domestic Dialing Function
If this option is selected and a callback telephone
number is programmed, the remote programming
computer must be connected to the telephone line
programmed in the callback telephone number in
Locations 159 to 174 (refer to Section 11.9 on page
51).
When the control panel is activated into alarm, it
dials the first programmed telephone number. If a
busy or engaged tone is detected, the control panel
hangs up and dials the sec telephone number (if one
is programmed). The first call is counted as one
unsuccessful dialing attempt. If the sec telephone
number is also busy or an engaged tone is detected,
the control panel hangs up and dials the third
telephone number (if one is programmed) or
attempts the first telephone number again.
If this option is not selected, the installer can connect
to a customer’s control panel from any remote
location for Upload/Download operations without
the control panel calling back to the remote
computer. The customer can initiate a modem call
from the codepad by holding down [6]. Refer to
Section 8.0 Alarm Link Software on page 40 for more
information.
If a busy tone is not detected, the control panel
assumes the telephone was answered and sends its
transmission. The transmission sequence consists of
an identification beep, followed by a siren tone and a
long pause. The transmission sequence is repeated
until the control panel receives an acknowledgment
tone during the pause. The control panel
automatically hangs up after 2 min. If more than one
control panel reports to the same telephone number,
the identification beep allows the customer to verify
the control panel that called. The identification beep
is programmed in Location 039 of the Subscriber ID
Number for Receiver 1 or Location 079 of the
Subscriber ID Number for Receiver 2.
4 – Terminate Alarm Link Connection on Alarm
If an alarm occurs when the control panel is
communicating with a remote computer using the
CC816 Alarm Link Software, the Alarm Link session
is terminated and the relevant alarm message is
transmitted to the base station receiver.
If an alarm occurs that does not have to be reported
to the base station receiver, the session is not
terminated. If this option is not selected and an alarm
occurs, the Alarm Link software prompts the
operator with a Terminate or Continue message.
When set up for Domestic Dialing
Format, the control panel attempts a
maximum of six calls for each alarm event.
This count includes any unsuccessful
calls. The counter is reset if the zone is
reactivated and the control panel
attempts an additional six calls. The
control panel stops dialing after six
attempts or three successful calls. The
control panel also stops dialing if a valid
User Code is entered at the remote
codepad.
9.0 Domestic Dialing
The locations of the primary and secondary
telephone numbers for Receiver 1 or Receiver 2 are
used only for base station and pager reporting. When
either Receiver 1 or Receiver 2 is set up for domestic
reporting, both the primary and secondary telephone
numbers are ignored.
The domestic dialing telephone numbers are stored
separately in Locations 550 to 597, which can store
up to 48 digits. These 48 locations can store one or
more telephone numbers. Depending on the length
of each telephone number, you can store four or
more different telephone numbers for domestic
dialing.
If both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 are
programmed for domestic dialing, the
maximum number of calls for each alarm
event is twelve.
To acknowledge domestic dialing:
If both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 are set up for
domestic reporting format, you still have 48 data
locations. Both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 use the
same domestic telephone numbers. Programming
separate domestic telephone numbers for Receiver 1
and Receiver 2 is not available for domestic dialing
format.
If the received call is not acknowledged during any
of the transmission pauses by pressing the [*] button
on a touch-tone telephone, the control panel
continues to send its transmission for two min. Then
it hangs up and dials the next telephone number. If
the call is successfully acknowledged, the control
panel hangs up and makes no more calls for that
event.
Refer to Section 9.2 Setting Up and Programming
Domestic Reporting on page 43 for more information.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 10.0
Dialer Reporting Formats
EN | 43
Example
9.2
Setting Up and Programming
Domestic Reporting
To program two separate telephone numbers (9672
1777 and 9672 1233), enter the following sequence:
Programming the control panel for domestic
reporting is extremely simple when using the
Installer’s Programming Command 965. Refer to
Section 7.4.7 Command 965 – Set Up Domestic Dialing
Format on page 38 for more information.
[2 5 8 0 2][AWAY][9 6 7 2 1 7 7 7][STAY] [4 9 6 7 2
1 2 3 3][AWAY]
You can cancel domestic dialing at any time (for
example, you are moving and do not want the
system to continue calling your work place or mobile
phone).
To set up the control panel for domestic dialing:
1. Enter the Installer Code and press [AWAY] to
enter Installer’s Programming Mode.
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash.
2. Enter [9 6 5] and press [AWAY].
Two beeps sound. The control panel is now set
up for Domestic Dialing Format.
To disable domestic dialing:
Enter your Master Code and press
[2][AWAY][STAY][4][AWAY].
10.0 Dialer Reporting Formats
10.1 Transmission Formats
The ICP-CC488 Control Panel provides a number of
transmission formats for its dialing and
communication features. Program the transmission
format for Receiver 1 in Location 033 and the
transmission format for Receiver 2 in Location 073
(refer to Section 11.4 Transmission Format for Receiver 1
and Receiver 2 on page 50). The control panel is set at
the factory to report in the Contact ID Format.
3. Enter [9 6 0] and press [AWAY] to exit from
Installer’s Programming Mode.
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators are extinguished. The system returns
to the disarmed state.
4. To program your telephone numbers, enter your
Master Code and press [2][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash.
If any telephone numbers are already
programmed, they are displayed one digit at a
time using the codepad indicators.
10.1.1
Contact ID Format
Contact ID Format can identify hundreds of
protection zones by their unique codes. This format
provides a single-digit Event Qualifier and a three-
digit Event Code that quickly identifies the reported
condition.
If no telephone numbers are programmed, two
additional beeps sound after you enter this mode.
These two beeps normally sound after the last
digit of the last phone number is displayed.
5. Enter the digits for telephone number 1, one
digit at a time.
In general, Contact ID Format is very simple because
most of the Event Codes and Point ID Codes are
predefined. The base station software usually can
identify an alarmed zone by its Point ID Code and
usually pays little attention to the Event Code.
As you enter each digit, the corresponding
codepad indicator lights.
6. After you enter all the digits of the first telephone
number, press [STAY][4] to insert a break
between the first telephone number and the sec
telephone number.
7. Repeat Step 6 for each additional phone number.
8. After the last digit of the last telephone number,
press [AWAY] to exit from this mode.
Refer to Section 10.1.3 Alarm Link Options on page 44
for more information about the ICP-CC488 Point ID
Codes.
Table 38: Domestic Dialing Digits
Digit
Required
Number to
Program
Digit
Required
Number to
Program
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8
9
*
#
[STAY]1
[STAY]2
[STAY]3
[STAY]4
[STAY]5
4 sec pause
break
15
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 10.0
Dialer Reporting Formats
EN | 44
Table 39: Contact ID Format Breakdown
Subscriber ID
Number
Qualifier
Event Code
XYZ
Group Number
GG
Point ID Number
CCC
SSSS
Q
Four-digit
Subscriber ID
Number
Event Qualifier, which provides Event Code
Group Number
(comprised of two
hex digits)
Point ID Number
(comprised of
three hex digits)
specific event information:
1 – New event or opening
3 – New restore or closing
(comprised of three
hex digits)
10.1.2
Contact ID Format
Table 41: 4 + 2 Reporting Format
Contact ID Format can identify hundreds of
protection zones by their unique codes. This format
provides a single-digit Event Qualifier and a three-
digit Event Code that quickly identifies the reported
condition.
New Event
Alarm
Trouble
Bypass
AC Fail
Low Battery
Opening Report
Closing Report
Test Report
Program Altered
Duress
4 + 2 Report
SSSS ACH
SSSS TCH
SSSS BCH
SSSS EAC
SSSS LLB
SSSS OU
SSSS CU
SSSS TE
In general, Contact ID Format is very simple because
most of the Event Codes and Point ID Codes are
predefined. The base station software usually can
identify an alarmed zone by its Point ID Code and
usually pays little attention to the Event Code.
Refer to Section 10.1.3 Alarm Link Options for more
information about the ICP-CC488 Point ID Codes.
SSSS P0
SSSS DD0
4 + 2 Report
SSSS R CH
SSSS TR CH
SSSS BR CH
SSSS ER ACR
SSSS L LB
10.1.3
Point ID Codes
Event
Table 43 on page 46 shows the different Point ID
Codes and Event Codes transmitted to the base
station receiver when using Contact ID Reporting
Format. All Event Codes are fixed. The control panel
always transmits the same code because there are no
programming locations to change the codes.
Alarm Restore
Trouble Restore
Bypass Restore
AC Fail Restore
Low Battery
Low Battery Restore SSSS LBR
Panic SSSS P PCH
10.1.4
4 + 2 Reporting Format
The 4 + 2 Express Format reports a Subscriber ID
Number followed by an Expansion Code. The
reporting Channel Number is transmitted directly
after the Expansion Code.
Table 40: Example Reporting in 4 + 2 Format
Subscriber ID
Number
Expansion
Code
Channel
Number
SSSS
A
CH
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 10.0
Dialer Reporting Formats
EN | 45
To set up Receiver 2 for basic pager reporting:
Table 42: 4 + 2 Transmission Code
Descriptions
1. Program the Basic Pager’s access telephone
number in Locations 040 to 055 (refer to Section
11.1 Primary Telephone Number for Receiver 1 and
Receiver 2 on page 49).
2. Program the Subscriber ID Number in Locations
074 to 079 (refer to Section 11.5 Subscriber ID
Number for Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 on page 50).
3. Select the Pager Handshake option (5) in
Location 072 (refer to Section 11.3 Handshake Tone
for Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 on page 49).
Code
SSSS
A
CH
0
Description
Subscriber ID Number
Alarm
Channel Number1
Zero
T
Trouble
B
E
AC
L
LB
Bypass
AC Fail Code 1st digit
AC Fail Code 2nd digit
Low Battery Code 1st digit
Low Battery Code 2nd digit
Open
4. Program the Basic Pager Format option (5) in
Location 073 (refer to Section 11.4 Transmission
Format for Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 on page 50).
The example in Figure 9 on page 47 shows:
O
•
A transmission from Subscriber ID
Number 5678
C
Close
U
R
User Number
•
•
•
•
•
•
Zone 2 is in alarm
Alarm Restore Code
Trouble Restore Code
Bypass Restore Code
AC Fail Restore Code 1st digit
AC Fail Restore Code 2nd digit
Low Battery Restore Code 1st digit
Low Battery Restore Code 2nd digit
Duress Code 1st digit
Duress Code 2nd digit
Panic Code 1st digit
Panic Code 2nd digit
Test Code
Zone 3 is manually isolated
The system is armed
TR
BR
ER
ACR
LR
LBR
D
D0
P
The Panic Zone is normal
The AC is connected
There is no fault condition.
PCH
TE
1 0=Zone 16, 1=Zones 1 through 15. Some receivers
might need to have parameters set to 0 for Zone 16
10.1.5
Basic Pager Reporting Format
Although Basic Pager Format requires some
interpretation of the numbers that appear on the
display, it is possible to differentiate among 1000
different control panels if a number of control panels
report to the one pager.
To set up Receiver 1 for basic pager reporting:
1. Program the Basic Pager’s access telephone
number in Locations 000 to 015 (refer to Section
11.1 Primary Telephone Number for Receiver 1 and
Receiver 2 on page 49).
2. Program the Subscriber ID Number in Locations
034 to 039 (refer to Section 11.5 Subscriber ID
Number for Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 on page 50).
3. Select the Pager Handshake option (5) in
Location 032 (refer to Section 11.3 Handshake Tone
for Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 on page 49).
4. Program the Basic Pager Format option (5) in
Location 033 (refer to Section 11.4 Transmission
Format for Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 on page 50).
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 10.0
Dialer Reporting Formats
EN | 46
Table 43: Point ID Codes
Point ID
Event Description
Event Code Explanation
Section
Zones 1 to 8
Burglary Zone
Medical Zone
Panic Zone
Hold-Up Zone
Tamper Zone
Burglary Zone
Fire
130
100
120
122
137
133
110
401
Burglary
14.3.2
14.3.2
14.3.2
14.3.2
14.3.2
14.3.2
14.3.2
15.14
24-Hour Medical
24-Hour Panic
24-Hour Hold-Up
24-Hour Tamper
24-Hour Burglary
24-Hour Fire
Opening – User #
Closing – User #
Opening – User #
Closing – User #
User Specific 1 to 16
User Specific 1 to 16
Open/Close Report
Open/Close Report Partitioned
402
15.14
User Specific 1 to 16
040
031
User Specific 1 to 16
041
046
045
042
044
047
Zone Specific 1 to 8
Zone Specific 1 to 8
Zone Specific 1 to 8
00
User Specific
Zone Specific 1 to 8
Zone Specific 1 to 8
001
Partial Close Report
AC MAINS Fail
Low Battery
Codepad Duress
Codepad Panic
Codepad Fire
Codepad Medical
Code Retry Limit Exceeded
Test Report – Automatic
Test Report After Siren Reset
Sensor Self Test Failure
456
301
309
121
120
110
100
421
602
602
307
Closing – User #
AC Power
Battery Test Failure
Duress Alarm
Panic Alarm
Fire Alarm
Medical Alarm
Access Denied
Test Report
Test Report
Sensor Watch
RF Device Supervision
Sensor Trouble
System Trouble
Walk Test Mode
Zone Tamper
RF Low Battery
RF Receiver Jamming
RF Receiver Tamper Switch
RF Receiver Failure
Zone Bypass
12.2
15.22
15.24
15.15
15.16
15.17
15.18
15.26
15.28
18.5
15.5
15.8
15.4
15.20
15.2
15.1
15.9
15.10
15.10
15.10
15.3
Trouble
AUX Power Supply Fail
Walk Test
Tamper
RF Low Battery
RF Receiver Fail
380
300
607
144
384
355
002
003
Zone Specific 1 to 8
Zone Specific 1 to 8
Zone Specific 1 to 8
Bypass
Bypass
Bypass
573
572
571
24-Hour Zone Bypass
24-Hour Fire Zone Bypass
15.3
15.3
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 10.0
Dialer Reporting Formats
EN | 47
Figure 9: Basic Pager Display
1 – Subscriber ID number
2 – Zone status
3 – System status
4 – 0 – Zone Normal
1– Alarm
2 –Manually Isolated
3 –Auto Isolated
5 – 8 – Disarmed
9 –Armed
6 – 0 – Normal
1 – Panic/Duress
2 – Fire Alarm
3 – Medical Alarm
7 – 0 – AC Normal
1 – AC Failure
8 – 0 – System Normal
1 – System Fault
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 11.0
Dialer Information
EN | 48
11.0 Dialer Information
10.2 Basic Pager Display Information
This section outlines the programming information
required for the ICP-CC488 Control Panel when
communicating with a base station receiver. These
parameters specify the telephone numbers to call,
transmission formats, handshake tones, and
transmission speeds.
The Pager format supports only eight
zones.
Subscriber ID Number
This is the identification number of the control panel
and is programmed in Locations 034 to 039 for
Receiver 1 and Locations 074 to 079 for Receiver 2
(refer to Section 11.5 Subscriber ID Number for Receiver 1
and Receiver 2 on page 50). The pocket pager displays
only the last three digits of the Subscriber ID
Number.
The control panel can report event information from
two on-board dialers. The first dialer reports to
Receiver 1 and the sec dialer reports to Receiver 2.
You can program each dialer with two separate
telephone numbers, handshake tone, reporting
format type, and Subscriber ID Number.
Example
Zone Status
You can set up Dialer 1 to report in Domestic
Dialing Format to Receiver 1 and set up Dialer 2 to
report to a base station receiver in Contact ID
Format only if Dialer 1 is unsuccessful.
The zone status display shows you the status of each
zone (1 to 8) of the control panel. Table 44 on page
48 describes each status number when displayed on a
pocket pager.
To program a telephone number:
Table 44: Zone Status Display
When programming a telephone number, you must
program a 0 as a 10. Each location in the primary,
secondary, and callback telephone numbers stores
one digit of the telephone number.
Status
Zone Description
0
Zone normal
You must insert a 0 at the end of a telephone number
to indicate to the dialer the end of the telephone
number is reached. The dialing sequence terminates
when a 0 appears.
The zone is sealed.
Alarm
The zone is unsealed and in alarm.
Zone bypassed
1
2
A system operator manually isolated the
zone. Refer to Section 3.11 Isolating
Zones on page 17for information about
manually isolating a zone(s) before arming
the system. Refer to Section 15.3 Zone
Status – Bypass Reports on page 65 for
more information.
Example
To program the telephone number 9672 1055 as the
Primary Telephone Number for Receiver 1, program
the following sequence into Locations 000 to 015:
[9 6 7 2 1 10 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0]
To enter a 4-sec pause in the dialing sequence,
program a 13. A pause might be necessary when the
dialer communicates through an old (slower)
telephone exchange or when a PABX system is in
place.
3
Zone trouble
A zone was left unsealed after the end of
Exit Time. Refer to Section 15.4 Zone
Status – Trouble Reports on page 65for
more information.
System Status
Example
The system status information shown by four digits is
defined in Figure 9 on page 47.
To program the number 02 pause 9 672 1055, enter:
[10 2 13 9 6 7 2 1 10 5 5 0 0 0 0 0].
•
The first digit indicates whether the system is
armed or disarmed.
Table 45 on page 55 shows how to program the
numbers, keys, and functions for a telephone
number.
•
The sec digit indicates if a codepad alarm was
activated by the operator (refer to Section 3.7
Codepad Duress Alarm through Section 3.10
Codepad Medical Alarm on page 17 for more
information).
•
•
The third digit indicates the status of the AC
MAINS supply.
The fourth digit indicates whether a system fault
occurred at the control panel (refer Section 3.12
Fault Analysis Mode on page 18 for more
information.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 11.0
Dialer Information
EN | 49
Contact your monitoring station or pager company
for the correct telephone numbers before you
program these locations.
Table 45: Dialing Digits
When Receiver 1 or 2 is set up for
domestic reporting, telephone numbers
programmed into these locations are
ignored. Refer to Section 5.1.3 Change
Domestic Phone Numbers on page 23
(using the Installer Code function) or
Section 5.2.4 Changing Domestic Phone
Numbers on page 28 (using the Master
Code Function).
Digit
Required
terminator
Number to
Program
Digit
Required
8
9
0
*
Number to
Program
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
#
4 sec pause 13
break
15
14
15
11.2 Secondary Telephone Number for
Receiver 1 and Receiver 2
11.1 Primary Telephone Number for
Receiver 1 and Receiver 2
Location
Default
Location
Default
016 to 031 (Receiver 1)
Location
Default
Location
Default
0
000 to 015 (Receiver 1)
056 to 071 (Receiver 2)
0
0
040 to 055 (Receiver 2)
0
Refer to Section 11.1 Primary Telephone Number for
Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 on page 49 for programming
information.
When the control panel transmits a report, the panel
dials the Primary Telephone Number to contact the
monitoring station or pager, for example. If the call is
successful, the relevant information is transmitted and
the dialer returns to Standby Mode.
When Receivers 1 or 2 is set up for
domestic reporting, telephone numbers
programmed into these locations are
ignored. Refer to Section 5.1.3 Change
Domestic Phone Numbers on page 23
(using the Installer Code function) or
Section 5.2.4 Changing Domestic Phone
Numbers on page 28 (using the Master
Code Function).
If unsuccessful, the dialer attempts two more calls
using the Primary Telephone Number for Receiver 1.
If these calls are unsuccessful, the dialer calls the
Secondary Telephone Number for Receiver 1 up to
three times. If the dialing sequence is still
unsuccessful, the control panel repeats this sequence
by dialing the Primary and Secondary Telephone
Numbers for Receiver 2 (if they are programmed).
11.3 Handshake Tone for Receiver 1 and
Receiver 2
032 (Receiver 1)
Location
If the first six attempts are unsuccessful and no
telephone numbers for Receiver 2 are programmed,
this procedure is repeated only once for a maximum
of twelve call attempts per alarm, after 10 min.
1
2
3
4
5
HI LO handshake (Contact ID Format)
1400 Hz (Ademco Tx @ 1900 Hz)
2300 Hz (Low Speed Sescoa)
No handshake
If the Primary and Secondary Telephone Numbers
for Receiver 2 are also programmed, the control
panel attempts a maximum of 24 calls per alarm.
Pager handshake
Location 072 (Receiver 2)
1
2
3
4
5
HI LO handshake (Contact ID Format)
1400 Hz (Ademco Tx @ 1900 Hz)
2300 Hz (Low Speed Sescoa)
No handshake
Pager handshake
These locations set the type of handshake tone
required for the receivers before data transmissions
to the monitoring station begin.
1 – HI LO Handshake
HI LO Handshake Tone is required to communicate
in Contact ID Format or High Speed DTMF.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 11.0
Dialer Information
EN | 50
2 – 1400 Hz
Example
1400 Hz Handshake Tone is required to
communicate in Ademco Lo Speed Format or
Domestic Dialing Format.
To program the Subscriber ID Number as 4729,
program the six locations as:
[0 0 4 7 2 9]
3 – 2300 Hz
11.6 Dialing Format
Reserved.
080
Location
4 – No Handshake
This option is not recommended.
5 – Pager Handshake
1
2
3
4
5
6
Australian DTMF (5 digits/sec)
Australian decadic
Alternate DTMF and Australian decadic
International DTMF (touch tone)
Reversed decadic (10 minus 1)
Alternate DTMF and reversed decadic
Pager Handshake Tone is required to communicate
in Basic Pager Format.
11.4 Transmission Format for Receiver 1
and Receiver 2
The Dialing Format determines the method for
dialing telephone numbers. Options 3 and 6 alternate
the dialing sequence between DTMF and decadic if
the call to the base station receiver is unsuccessful.
Use caution when selecting the dialing method.
033 (Receiver 1)
Contact ID
4 + 2 express
FSK 300 baud Bell
Domestic
Location
1
2
3
4
5
Select the Australian method only if the control panel
is connected to the Australian Telecommunications
Network. Select the International DTMF dialing
option only in countries that allow both the caller
and the receiver to terminate a phone call. Using the
incorrect format can disable the control panel’s
patented Telephone Anti-Jamming feature.
Basic pager
073 (Receiver 2)
Contact ID
4 + 2 express
FSK 300 baud Bell
Domestic
Location
1
2
3
4
5
The alternating sequence is: DTMF –
decadic – DTMF – decadic – DTMF –
decadic.
Basic pager
Select the desired transmission format here. These
locations select the data format used to transmit to
the base station receiver. These locations also allow
you to configure the control panel for domestic or
basic pager formats.
11.7 Telco Arming Sequence
113 to 142
Location
0
Default
These locations allow you to activate call diversion
automatically on your telephone when you arm the
system in AWAY Mode.
11.5 Subscriber ID Number for
Receiver 1 and Receiver 2
When the Telco Arming Sequence is activated after
arming the system in AWAY Mode, the control
panel redirects all calls to your mobile phone, pocket
pager, or answering service.
034 to 039 (Receiver 1)
Location
Default
Location
Default
0
074 to 079 (Receiver 2)
0
Contact your telecommunications provider for more
information on Call Forward operations.
The Subscriber ID Number is transmitted to identify
the calling control panel. Enter the Subscriber ID
Number in the six locations provided for each
receiver.
For Basic Pager Format, Locations 034 to 036 (for
Receiver 1) and Locations 074 to 076 (for Receiver 2)
are ignored and the first digit of the Subscriber ID
Number must start in Location 037 (Receiver 1) and
Location 077 (Receiver 2).
When using Domestic Dialing Format, the number of
identification beeps is determined by the value
programmed in Location 039 (Receiver 1) and
Location 079 (Receiver 2). This value allows the
identification of up to 15 different control panels that
call the same telephone number.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 11.0
Dialer Information
EN | 51
11.9 Call Back Telephone Number
Table 46: Telco Arm/Disarm Dialing Digits
159 to 174
0
Location
Default
Digit
Required
terminator
Number to
Program
Digit
Required
8
9
0
*
#
4 sec pause
break
15
Number to
Program
8
This location stores the telephone number to call
when Upload/Download is requested or the user
holds down [6] to initiate a modem call from the
control panel to establish a communications link with
the remote computer. The computer must be running
the CC816 Alarm Link Software and must be set to
Waiting for an Incoming Call. The Call Back
Telephone Number is also required if Remote
Connection with Callback Verification is required
(refer to Section 8.1.3 on page 41).
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Refer to Section 8.0 Alarm Link Software on page 40
for more information.
To turn call forward (immediate) on, enter:
[* 2 1][forwarding telephone number][#]
Example
11.10 Ring Count
175
Location
Default
0
To immediately forward all incoming calls to the
telephone number 96721055 after arming the system
in AWAY Mode, program:
8
Panel does not answer
1 to 13 Number of rings until panel answers
[11 2 1 9 6 7 2 1 10 5 5 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0]
14
15
Answering machine bypass 2
Answering machine bypass 1
To turn call forward (no answer) on, enter:
[* 6 1][forwarding telephone number][#]
Example
This location sets the number of rings before the
control panel answers an incoming call. Set this
count to an acceptable level, noting that one ring is
“Ring, Ring – Ring, Ring” and that a Ring Count of
10 represents approximately 60 sec. This location has
an effect only if Remote Arming, remote
Upload/Download using Alarm Link, or both are
enabled. Programming this location to 0 prevents the
control panel from answering incoming calls
regardless of other programmed options.
To forward all incoming calls, when there is no
answer, to the telephone number 96721055 after
arming the system in AWAY Mode, program:
[11 6 1 9 6 7 2 1 10 5 5 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0]
11.8 Telco Disarming Sequence
Answering Machine Bypass
143 to 158
Location
0
Default
Answering Machine Bypass allows a connection with
the control panel for Remote Arming or
These locations allow you to deactivate call diversion
automatically on your telephone when you disarm
the system from AWAY Mode.
Upload/Download when an answering machine or
facsimile machine is on the same telephone line.
Answering Machine Bypass has two different
methods. Program a 14 to use the secondary method
only when there is a large amount of traffic on the
line (at a home office, for example). This method
reduces the chance of the control panel incorrectly
answering an incoming call.
To turn call forward (immediate) off, enter:
[# 2 1 #]
Example
To disable call forward (immediate) after disarming
the system from AWAY Mode, program:
Programming the Ring Count to 15 enables
[12 2 1 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0]
To turn call forward (no answer) off, enter:
[# 6 1 #]
Answering Machine Bypass in the primary mode.
When calling the control panel, allow the telephone
to ring no more than four times and then hang up. If
you call again within 45 sec, the control panel
answers the call on the first ring and the connection
is established. This prevents the answering machine
or facsimile machine from answering the call. To
enable Answering Machine Bypass only when the
system is armed, select Option 2 in Location 177
(refer to Section 12.1 Dialer Options 1 on page 52).
Example
To disable call forward (no answer) after disarming
the system from AWAY Mode, program:
[12 6 1 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0]
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 12.0
Dialer Options
EN | 52
Program the Ring Count to 14 to enable Answering
2 – Sound Alarm When System Is Armed
Machine Bypass in the secondary mode. In this case,
call the control panel and allow the phone to ring no
more than twice and hang up. Wait a minimum of 8
sec and call the control panel again. The control
panel answers on the first ring. If you do not wait the
8 sec, the control panel does not answer the call. To
enable Answering Machine Bypass only when the
system is armed, select Option 2 in Location 177
(refer to Section 12.1 Dialer Options 1 on page 52).
You must also select Option 1 to use this option. If
the control panel detects that the telephone line is
disconnected when the system is armed, the horn
speaker, bell, and strobe outputs are activated. If only
one audible alarm per arming cycle is required, select
the Lockout Telephone Line Fail Alarm option (2) in
Location 179 (refer to Section 12.3 Dialer Options 3 on
page 53).
4 – Sound Alarm when System Is Disarmed
Set the Ring Count for the answering
machine or facsimile machine to a value
greater than two rings. Four to six rings is
preferred.
You must also select Option 1 to use this option. If
the control panel detects that the telephone line is
disconnected when the system is disarmed, the horn
speaker, bell, and strobe outputs are activated. If only
one audible alarm per arming cycle is required, select
the Lockout Telephone Line Fail Alarm option (2) in
Location 179 (refer to Section 12.3 Dialer Options 3 on
page 53).
Program a 0 into this location to disable
the control panel from answering an
incoming call.
11.11 Telephone Line Fault Options
If you program 7 in this location, the horn
speaker, bell, strobe, and EDMSAT
outputs are all activated when the system
is armed or disarmed.
176
Location
0
Default
1
2
4
8
Display FAULT indicator when telephone line fails
Sound alarm when system is armed
Sound alarm when system is disarmed
Reserved
12.0 Dialer Options
This location has three options. You can select any
combination of these options by programming a
single value. Calculate this value by adding the
option bit numbers together. Refer to Section 7.3
Programming Option Bits on page 36 for more
information.
Locations 177, 178, 179, and 180 have up to four
options per location available for programming. You
can select any combination of the options by
programming a single value. Calculate this value by
adding the option bit numbers together. Refer to
Section 7.3 Programming Option Bits on page 36 for
more information.
The control panel monitors the telephone line. If the
telephone line is cut or disconnected for longer than
40 sec, the control panel lights the FAULT indicator
on the codepad. The FAULT indicator is
extinguished after the telephone line is restored for
longer than 40 sec.
12.1 Dialer Options 1
177
Location
1
2
4
8
Dialer reporting functions allowed
Remote arming by telephone allowed
Answering machine bypass only when armed
Bell 103 used for FSK format
(disabled = CCITT V21)
Options 2 and 4 do not operate unless
you also enable Option 1.
1 – Dialer Reporting Functions Allowed
1 – Display FAULT indicator When the Telephone
Line Fails
If you select this option, the dialer operates for all
functions.
When this options is selected, the FAULT indicator
flashes and the codepad buzzer beeps once per min if
the control panel detects that the telephone line is
disconnected. Refer to Section 3.13 Fault Descriptions
on page 18 for more information.
If you do not select this option, the communication
dialer does not operate.
Upload/Download using the CC816 Alarm Link
Software and telephone remote arming remains
operational regardless of this setting.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 12.0
Dialer Options
EN | 53
If the system is disarmed when an alarm
2 – Remote Arming by Telephone Allowed
occurs, only a Closing Report is sent the
next time the system is armed.
If you select this option, you can remotely arm the
system using a standard telephone by pressing [*] on
your touch-tone telephone. Refer to Section 6.0 Remote
Arming by Telephone on page 34 for more information.
Forced arming is automatically assumed when this
feature is used. Refer to Section 14.3.7 Zone Options 2
on page 63 for more information on forced arming.
A User Code with a priority set to Always
Send Open/Close Reports overrides this
feature (Open/Close Reports are always
sent for that User Code).
2 – Open/Close Reports for STAY Mode 1 and
STAY Mode 2
Remote arming by telephone is not affected by
whether remote functions are enabled or disabled.
Refer to Section 8.2 Alarm Link Options on page 41 for
programming the number of rings before the control
panel answers an incoming call.
Select this option if Open and Close Reports are
required when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1
or STAY Mode 2.
If this option is selected, a Partial Close Report
(Contact ID Event Code 456) is sent when the system
is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2.
4 – Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed
Select this option to enable the Answering Machine
Bypass feature when the system is armed. When the
system is disarmed, the control panel does not
answer any incoming calls. This option is beneficial
in high telephone traffic installations where the
control panel could answer an incoming call. Refer to
Section 8.2 Alarm Link Options on page 41 to program
Answering Machine Bypass.
Open/Close Reports must be enabled in Locations
401 and 402 (refer to Section 15.13 Open/Close Reports
on page 65) for this option to work.
4 – Delay Siren until Transmission Complete
If this option is selected, the EDMSAT, horn speaker,
bell, and strobe outputs are not activated until after
the control panel sends the message and the base
station receiver sends a kiss-off back to the control
panel. If multiple messages are transmitted, the sirens
are activated after the last kiss-off is sent.
8 – Use Bell 103 for FSK Format (Disabled=CCITT
V21)
If this option is selected, the control panel uses the
BELL 103 transmission frequency at 300 baud. If this
option is not selected, the control panel uses the
CCITT V21 transmission frequency at 300 baud.
If a Codepad Panic, Codepad Fire, or Codepad
Medical Alarm is activated, the EDMSAT, horn
speaker, bell, and strobe outputs operate
immediately.
12.2 Dialer Options 2
178
Location
8 – Extend Time to Wait for Handshake from 30 to
60 Sec
0
Default
1
2
Open/Close Reports only if previous alarm
Open/Close Reports for STAY Mode 1 and STAY
Mode 2
Delay siren until transmission complete
Extend handshake wait time from 30 sec to 60 sec
By default, the control panel waits approximately 30
sec for receipt of a valid handshake tone after it dials
the monitoring station. The handshake tone indicates
to the control panel that it reached the monitoring
station and can now transmit its messages. Selecting
this option extends this wait time from 30 sec to 60
sec.
4
8
1 – Open/Close Reports Only if Previous Alarm
When selected, an Opening Report is transmitted to
the base station receiver when the system is disarmed
after an alarm occurred. When the system is armed, a
Closing Report is transmitted. An Opening or
Closing Report does not report again until the system
registers another alarm.
12.3 Dialer Options 3
179
Location
1
2
4
8
Set DTMF dialing pulses to 1 digit per sec
Lockout Telephone Line Fail Alarm
Change decadic dialing to 60/40
Reserved
Open/Close Reports must be enabled in Locations
401 and 402 (refer to Section 15.13 Open/Close Reports
on page 65) for this option to work.
1 – Set DTMF Dialing Pulses to 1 Digit/Sec
For a partitioned ICP-CC488 Control Panel, an
Open/Close Report is sent only for the area in which
the alarm occurred.
If this option is not selected, the Australian DTMF
dialing format dials at 5 digits per sec (that is, 100 ms
tone, 100 ms pause, 100 ms tone, 100 ms pause).
If this option is selected, the Australian DTMF
dialing format dials at the rate of 1 digit per sec (that
is, 500 ms tone, 500 ms pause).
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 13.0
Access Codes
EN | 54
2 – Lockout Telephone Line Fail Alarm
13.2 User Codes
Selecting this option allows an audible alarm only
once per arming cycle when the control panel detects
the telephone line is cut or disconnected. This option
does not follow the Swinger Shutdown Count for
Siren, in which you can program the number of
times a zone can sound an alarm during an arming
cycle. Use Location 176 to program the telephone
line fault options (refer to Section 11.11 on page 52).
The purpose of User Codes is to arm and disarm the
system and to perform other specific functions as
described in Section 5.2 Master Code Functions 26. A
Master Code holder can change or delete User
Codes at any time.
User Codes 1 to 8 can be one to four digits long.
Each User Code has its own priority level. More than
one User Code can have the same priority level. The
priority level controls the behavior of the code, such
as allowing it to arm only, arm and disarm, or allow
access to the Master Code functions. The installer
can assign access to Master Code functions to
4 – Change Decadic Dialing to 60/40
Some countries have different requirements for
decadic dialing. Selecting this option changes the
dialing characteristics from 65/35 (Australian
Standard) to 60/40. Select this option only when the
control panel is used in a country that requires
decadic dialing as 60/40. This option has no effect
when using DTMF tone dialing.
multiple User Codes. The priority level for each User
Code is programmed in the last location of the code.
Only the installer can change the priority
level.
12.4 Alarm Link Options
180
Location
1
2
Although 16 User Codes are available, User Codes 9
through 16 can only be Remote Radio User Codes.
Refer to Section 4.0 Remote Radio Transmitter Operations
on page 20 for more information.
Upload/download allowed
Call back phone number required for
upload/download
4
Exit upload/download connection on alarm
User Code 16 is reported when any of these methods
are used to arm or disarm the system:
For more information about this location, refer to
Section 8.2 Alarm Link Options on page 41.
•
Arming and disarming using remote radio
control equipment connected to the RE005
2 Channel Radio Interface.
13.0 Access Codes
This section describes the access codes used to assign
privileges and access functions for User Code holders
of the system. There are two types of access codes:
the Installer Code and User Codes. Each of these
codes allows specific access and operation of control
panel functions.
•
Arming and disarming using the CC816 Alarm
Link Software.
•
•
Arming remotely by telephone.
Single button arming in AWAY Mode, STAY
Mode 1, or STAY Mode 2.
•
•
•
Single button disarming from STAY Mode 1 or
STAY Mode 2.
13.1 Installer Code
181 to 184
Location
Automatic arming in AWAY Mode or STAY
Mode 1.
Location
181
182
183
184
Default
1
2
3
4
Automatic disarming from AWAY Mode, STAY
Mode 1, or STAY Mode 2
13.2.1
User Codes
This code is used to access Installer’s Programming
Mode. The Installer Code can be up to four digits
long. After the control panel is powered up, the
Installer Code can disarm the system if it is the first
code used. The next time the Installer Code is used
enables access to Installer’s Programming Mode.
The ICP-CC488 Control Panel can have up to
sixteen programmable User Codes (1 to 16) to
operate the system. Refer to Section 3.0 System
Operations on page 14 for information about the
different methods to arm and disarm the system.
If you want to remotely operate the system using
hand-held remote transmitters, you can program
User Codes 9 to 16 as remote User Codes. Refer to
Section 4.0 Remote Radio Transmitter Operations on page
20 for information on remote operations and adding
and deleting Remote Radio User Codes.
Installer Code functions allow the installer to execute
functions when the system is disarmed without the
customer’s Master Code. Refer to Section 5.1 Installer
Code Functions on page 22 for more information.
Refer to Section 7.1 Programming with the Remote
Codepad on page 34 for more information on
programming the system.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 13.0
Access Codes
EN | 55
13.3 User Code Priority
185 to 264
Location
Location
185
186
Default
2
5
The installer can assign one of ten different priority
levels to a User Code. Each priority level allows or
restricts a user from performing specific functions.
User Code 1
187
188
8
0
Table 47: Priority Levels
Priority Level 189
190 to 193
Priority Level 194
195 to 198
Priority Level 199
200 to 203
Priority Level 204
205 to 208
Priority Level 209
210 to 213
Priority Level 214
215 to 218
Priority Level 219
10
15
2
15
2
15
2
15
2
15
2
15
2
0
15
3
15
2
15
2
15
2
15
2
15
2
15
2
15
2
15
2
User Code 2
User Code 3
User Code 4
User Code 5
User Code6
User Code 7
User Code 8
Priority Description
Level
0
1
2
3
4
6
Arm/disarm
Arm only
Arm/disarm and Open/Close Reports
Arm only and Close Report
Arm/disarm and code to isolate
Arm/disarm, code to isolate, and Open/Close
Reports
8
Arm/disarm and Master Code functions
10
Arm/disarm, Master Code functions, and
Open/Close Reports
12
14
Arm/disarm, Master Code functions, and code
to isolate
Arm/disarm, Master Code functions, code to
isolate, and Open/Close Reports
220
221 to 223
Priority Level 224
225 to 228
Priority Level 229
230 to 233
Priority Level 234
235 to 238
Priority Level 239
240 to 243
Priority Level 244
245 to 248
Priority Level 249
250 to 253
Priority Level 254
255 to 258
Priority Level 259
260 to 263
Priority Level 264
User Code 9
User Code 10
User Code 11
User Code 12
User Code 13
User Code 14
User Code 15
User Code 16
Arm/Disarm
The user can arm and disarm the system. A Closing
Report is sent only after a previous code with the
ability to send an Opening Report disarms the
system.
Arm Only
The user can arm the system but cannot disarm the
system. A Closing Report is sent only after a previous
code with the ability to send an Opening Report
disarms the system.
Open/Close Reports
Open and Close Reports are sent to the monitoring
station when the user disarms and arms the system,
but only if Open/Close Reports is enabled in
Locations 401 and 402 (refer to Section 15.13
Open/Close Reports on page 67).
Code To Isolate
If one or more User Codes include this option, the
method of standard isolating is disabled and only a
User Code with this option in its priority level can
isolate zones before arming the system using the
Code to Isolate method. Refer to Section 3.11 Isolating
Zones on page 17 for more information.
When priority level 4, 6, 12, or 14 is
assigned to any User Codes, the
Standard Isolating method no longer
operates. Only User Codes with a priority
level of 4, 6, 12, or 14 can isolate zones
using the Code to Isolate method.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 14.0
Zone Information
EN | 56
Master Code Functions
14.1.3
Day Alarm Operation
The user has access to all Master Code functions.
Refer to Section 5.2 Master Code Functions on page 26
for more information.
If a zone is programmed for Day Alarm, the zone
can be isolated in the normal way so that it does not
register as a Day Alarm Zone when the system is
disarmed. You can use only Zones 1 to 4 as Day
Alarm Zones.
14.0 Zone Information
14.1 Day Alarm Information
You can program the STAY indicator to indicate
whether Day Alarm is turned on or off by selecting
Option 8 in Location 496 (refer to Section 18.5
Consumer Options 1 on page 82). When Day Alarm is
on, the STAY indicator flashes once every 3 sec.
265
Location
0
Default
1
2
4
8
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
You can program an output to mimic a zone for
monitoring Zones 5 to 8. Refer to Section 16.2 Output
Event Types on page 71 for more information on the
Output Event Types that you can program.
This location has four programming options. You
can select any combination of the options by
programming a single value. Calculate this value by
adding the option bit numbers together. Refer to
Section 7.3 Programming Option Bits on page 36 for
more information.
To turn Day Alarm on:
Press and hold [4] until three beeps sound.
To turn Day Alarm off:
Press and hold [4] until two beeps sound.
Day Alarm allows some zones to be monitored when
the system is disarmed. Indications are available at
any of the programmable outputs, including the
codepad buzzer. This function accommodates
latching and non-latching Day Alarm Output Event
Types.
14.2 EOL Resistor Value
266
Location
0
No EOL
1
2
3
1K (brown, black, red)
1K5 (brown, green, red)
2K2 (red, red, red)
When the system is armed in AWAY Mode, STAY
Mode 1, or STAY Mode 2, zones programmed as
Day Alarm Zones activate the sirens and dialer just
as non-Day Alarm Zones do. When Day Alarm is
activated, it ignores any zone Pulse Count settings
programmed for that zone (that is, the zone Pulse
Count is only relevant when the system is armed).
4
5
6
3K3 (orange, orange, black, brown) 1%
3K9 (orange, white, red)
4K7 (yellow, violet, red)
5K6 (green, blue, red)
6K8 (blue, grey, black, brown) 1%
10K (brown, black, orange)
12K (brown, red, orange)
22K (red, red, orange)
Reserved
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Example
You can set up a Day Alarm at the front door of a
shop with a pressure mat or electronic beam that is
activated when a customer enters the shop. When a
customer walks on the pressure mat or breaks the
electronic beam, the codepad buzzer beeps.
Reserved
Split EOL (3K3/6K8) with tamper (1K)
Split EOL 1% resistors
You can program the control panel for different end-
of-line (EOL) resistor values. This is a global
parameter that affects all zones simultaneously. This
feature allows you to install the ICP-CC488 Control
Panel at an existing site without changing the EOL
resistors. This feature also increases the security of
the system because eleven possible EOL resistor
values can be used, which makes it extremely
difficult to tamper with the system.
14.1.1
Day Alarm Resetting
An output that is programmed for Day Alarm
Resetting operates when a zone programmed for Day
Alarm is activated. The output is reset after the zone
is resealed. This occurs only when the system is
disarmed. Refer to Output Event Type 0,14 Day Alarm
Resetting on page 72 for more information.
14.1.2
Day Alarm Latching
An output that is programmed for Day Alarm
Latching operates when a zone programmed for Day
Alarm is activated. The zone indicator and the
latching output resets when [AWAY] is pressed. This
occurs only when the system is disarmed. Refer to
Output Event Type 0,15 Day Alarm Latching on page 72
for more information.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 14.0
Zone Information
EN | 57
This configuration is suitable only for
Figure 11: Split EOL Resistors with Tamper
normally-closed (N/C) contacts. If
normally-open (N/O) contacts are used,
as is the case with most smoke
detectors, a short circuit on one zone
activates both zones connected in
parallel.
Circuit
2
3
If you require N/O contacts when using
split EOL resistors, refer to Figure 12 and
Figure 13 on pages 57 and 58 for
information on how to connect N/O
contacts.
1
1
4
4
6
5
Figure 10: Split EOL Resistors Using N/C
Contacts
1 – Tamper
2 – Zone 1 3K3
3 – Zone 5 6K8
4 – 1K
5 – Zone 1
6 – +12V
1
9
2
9
Figure 12: Split EOL Resistors Using One N/O
Contact
5
10
9
6
10
3
9
4
1
4
2
6
7
10
5
8
10
3
1 – Zone 1
2 – Zone 2
3 – Zone 3
4 – Zone 4
5 – Zone 5
6 – Zone 6
7 – Zone 7
8 – Zone 8
9 – 3K3
7
8
10 –6K8
1 – +12 V
2 – Zone Input
3 – Zone
5 – EOL 3K3
6 – EOL 6K8
7 – EOL 4K7
8 – N/O
4 – N/C
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 14.0
Zone Information
EN | 58
The Zone Dialer Options location enables you to
Figure 13: Split EOL Resistors Using Two N/O
Contacts
specify how a zone reports to a base station receiver.
Refer to Section 14.3.9 Zone Dialer Options on page 64
for more information.
1
14.3.1 ICP-CC488 Zone Defaults
267 to 378
Location
5
7
4
6
2
3
Location
Default
Zone #01 (Default = Delay–1)
Zone Type 267
2
0
0
1
14
1
Zone Pulse Count 268
Zone Pulse Count Time 269
Zone Options 1 270
Zone Options 2 271
Report Code 272
Dialer Options 273
1
8
8
Zone #02 (Default = Handover)
Zone Type 274
1
Zone Pulse Count 275
Zone Pulse Count Time 276
Zone Options 1 277
Zone Options 2 278
Report Code 279
0
0
1
14
1
1 – +12 V
2 – Zone Input
3 – Zone
5 – EOL 6K8
6 – EOL 1K5
7 – EOL 4K7
8 – N/O
4 – EOL 3k3
Dialer Options 280
1
14.3 Zone Programming
Zone #03 (Default = Handover)
Zone Type 281
1
0
0
1
14
1
The programming information for each zone is
stored in seven locations divided into three groups.
The first three locations determine how the zone
operates, the next two locations set up a number of
zone options, and the last two locations store the
dialer reporting information for the zone.
Zone Pulse Count 282
Zone Pulse Count Time 283
Zone Options 1 284
Zone Options 2 285
Report Code 286
Dialer Options 287
1
Zone Operating Information
Zone #04 (Default = Handover)
Zone Type 288
These locations store the Zone Type (for example,
Delay-1, Instant, or 24-Hour), the Zone Pulse Count,
and the Zone Pulse Count Time. The Zone Pulse
Count specifies the number of times the zone must
activate within the time specified in the Zone Pulse
Count Time. Refer to Sections 14.3.2 Zone Types,
14.3.3 Zone Pulse Count, and 14.3.4 Zone Pulse Count
Time on pages 59 through 61 for more information.
1
0
0
1
14
1
1
Zone Pulse Count 289
Zone Pulse Count Time 290
Zone Options 1 291
Zone Options 2 292
Report Code 293
Dialer Options 294
Zone #05 (Default = Instant)
Zone Type 295
Zone Options
0
0
0
1
14
1
These two locations allow you to select from a
number of options. Refer to Sections 14.3.5 Zone
Options 1 on page 61 and 14.3.7 Zone Options 2 on
page 63 for more information.
Zone Pulse Count 296
Zone Pulse Count Time 297
Zone Options 1 298
Zone Options 2 299
Report Code 300
Zone Reporting Information
Dialer Options 301
1
This information includes the locations for the Zone
Report Code and the Zone Dialer Options.
Zone #06 (Default = Instant)
Zone Type 302
0
0
0
1
14
1
The Zone Report Code determines if the control
panel sends Alarm Reports for the zone. Refer to
Section 14.3.8 Zone Report Code on page 64 for more
information.
Zone Pulse Count 303
Zone Pulse Count Time 304
Zone Options 1 305
Zone Options 2 306
Report Code 307
Dialer Options 308
1
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 14.0
Zone Information
EN | 59
267 to 378 (continued)
Location
267 to 378 (continued)
Location
Location
Location
Default
Default
Zone #07 (Default = Instant)
Zone Type 309
Zone #13 (Default = Instant)
Zone Type 351
0
0
0
1
12
1
15
0
0
1
14
1
Zone Pulse Count 310
Zone Pulse Count Time 311
Zone Options 1 312
Zone Options 2 313
Report Code 314
Zone Pulse Count 352
Zone Pulse Count Time 353
Zone Options 1 354
Zone Options 2 355
Report Code 356
Dialer Options 315
1
Dialer Options 357
1
Zone #08 (Default = 24-hr. Tamper)
Zone Type 316
Zone #14 (Default = Instant)
Zone Type 358
9
0
0
1
12
1
15
0
0
1
14
1
Zone Pulse Count 317
Zone Pulse Count Time 318
Zone Options 1 319
Zone Options 2 320
Report Code 321
Zone Pulse Count 359
Zone Pulse Count Time 360
Zone Options 1 361
Zone Options 2 362
Report Code 363
Dialer Options 322
1
Dialer Options 364
1
Zone #09 (Default = Instant)
Zone Type 323
Zone #15 (Default = Instant)
Zone Type 365
15
0
0
1
14
1
15
0
0
1
14
1
Zone Pulse Count 324
Zone Pulse Count Time 325
Zone Options 1 326
Zone Options 2 327
Report Code 328
Zone Pulse Count 366
Zone Pulse Count Time 367
Zone Options 1 368
Zone Options 2 369
Report Code 370
Dialer Options 329
1
Dialer Options 371
1
Zone #10 (Default = Instant)
Zone Type 330
Zone #16 (Default = Instant)
Zone Type 372
15
0
0
1
14
1
15
0
0
1
14
1
Zone Pulse Count 331
Zone Pulse Count Time 332
Zone Options 1 333
Zone Options 2 334
Report Code 335
Zone Pulse Count 373
Zone Pulse Count Time 374
Zone Options 1 375
Zone Options 2 376
Report Code 377
Dialer Options 336
1
Dialer Options 378
1
Zone #11 (Default = Instant)
Zone Type 337
You can program Zones 1 to 16 as any zone type.
15
0
0
1
14
1
Zone Pulse Count 338
Zone Pulse Count Time 339
Zone Options 1 340
Zone Options 2 341
Report Code 342
Dialer Options 343
1
Zone #12 (Default = Instant)
Zone Type 344
15
0
0
1
14
1
Zone Pulse Count 345
Zone Pulse Count Time 346
Zone Options 1 347
Zone Options 2 348
Report Code 349
Dialer Options 350
1
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 14.0
14.3.2 Zone Types
Zone Information
3 – Delay-2 Zone
EN | 60
A Delay-2 Zone (Contact ID Event Code 130) has a
delay time determined by the value in Locations 468
and 469 (refer to Section 17.3 Entry Timer 2 on page
78). After Entry Time expires, the system activates an
alarm.
The zone types are listed in Table 48.
Table 48: Zone Types
Zone Type
0
Description
Instant
If a Delay-2 Zone is not restored when the system is
disarmed, a Zone Restore Report is automatically
sent to the receiving party.
1
Handover
2
Delay-1
6 – 24-Hour Medical Zone
3
Delay-2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Reserved
Reserved
A 24-Hour Medical Zone (Contact ID Event Code
100) is always ready to activate the dialer, horn
speaker, bell, and strobe, whether the system is
armed or disarmed. A Medical Report is transmitted
to the base station receiver. A 24-Hour Medical Zone
does not send a Restore Report until the zone is
restored.
24-Hour Medical
24-Hour Panic
24-Hour Holdup
24-Hour Tamper
Reserved
Keyswitch
7 – 24-Hour Panic Zone
24-Hour Burglary
24-Hour Fire
Chime Only
Not used
A 24-Hour Panic Zone (Contact ID Event Code 120)
is always ready to activate the dialer, horn speaker,
bell, and strobe, whether the system is armed or
disarmed. A Panic Report is transmitted to the base
station receiver. A 24-Hour Panic Zone does not
send a Restore Report until the zone is restored.
0 – Instant Zone
An Instant Zone (Contact ID Event Code 130)
immediately sounds the sirens and operates the dialer 8 – 24-Hour Holdup Zone
if it is unsealed after the Exit Timer expires.
A 24-Hour Holdup Zone (Contact ID Event Code
122) is always ready to activate the dialer, horn
speaker, bell, and strobe, whether the system is
armed or disarmed. If you want the holdup alarm to
be silent, select Option 4 in the first Zone Options
location (refer to Section 14.3.5 Zone Options 1 on page
61). A 24-Hour Holdup Zone does not send a
Restore Report until the zone is restored.
If an Instant Zone is not restored when the time the
system is disarmed, a Zone Restore Report is
automatically sent to the receiving party.
1 – Handover Zone
A Handover Zone (Contact ID Event Code 130) acts
as an Instant Zone if it is activated by itself. If a
Handover Zone is activated after a Delay Zone, the
remaining Delay Time is handed over from the
Delay Zone to the Handover Zone.
9 – 24-Hour Tamper Zone
A 24-Hour Tamper Zone (Contact ID Event Code
137) is always ready to activate the dialer, horn
speaker, bell, and strobe, whether the system is
armed or disarmed. A 24-Hour Tamper zone does
not send a Restore Report until the zone is restored.
Handover can be sequential or non-sequential. The
default settings is sequential handover. You can
disable sequential handover by disabling Option 8 in
Location 494 (refer to Section 18.3 System Options 3 on
page 81).
11 – Keyswitch Zone
Use a Keyswitch Zone to connect a keyswitch to
operate the system. Refer to Section 14.3.6 Keyswitch
Zone Options for information on programming this
zone type. User Code 16 is reported when arming
and disarming using this method of operation.
Programming the priority level of User Code 16 also
affects the operation of the Keyswitch Zone. Refer to
Section 13.3 User Code Priority for more information.
If a Handover Zone is not restored when the system
is disarmed, a Zone Restore Report is automatically
sent to the receiving party.
2 – Delay-1 Zone
A Delay-1 Zone (Contact ID Event Code 130) has a
delay time determined by the value in Locations 466
and 467 (refer to Section 17.2 Entry Timer 1 on page
78). After Entry Time expires, the system activates an
alarm.
12 – 24-Hour Burglary Zone
A 24-Hour Burglary Zone (Contact ID Event Code
133) is always ready to activate the dialer, horn
speaker, bell, and strobe, whether the system is
armed or disarmed. A 24-Hour Burglary zone does
not send a Restore Report until the zone is restored.
If a Delay-1 Zone is not restored when the system is
disarmed, a Zone Restore Report is automatically
sent to the receiving party.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 14.0
Zone Information
EN | 61
13 – 24-Hour Fire Zone
14.3.4
Zone Pulse Count Time
A 24-Hour Fire Zone (Contact ID Event Code 110) is Zone pulse count time is the time frame or period
always ready to activate the dialer, horn speaker,
bell, and strobe, whether the system is armed or
disarmed. A distinct fire sound is emitted through the
horn speaker to indicate this type of alarm. This fire
sound is completely different from the burglary
sound. A 24-Hour Fire zone does not send a Restore
Report until the zone is restored.
over which the programmed number of pulses must
register to activate an alarm.
Table 49: Zone Pulse Count Times
20 ms Loop Response
Option Time (sec)
150 ms Loop Response
Option Time (sec)
14 – Chime Zone
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0.5
1
2
3
4
5
10
15
8
9
20
30
40
50
60
90
120
200
A Chime Zone is not a burglary zone. It can never
sound the sirens or activate the dialer. Its purpose is
to map the zone to a programmable output to
indicate if the zone is sealed or unsealed. Refer to
Output Event Type 4,5 Global Chime on page 75.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Chime zones require EOL resistors and are
registered at a remote codepad. These zones do not
affect the operation of forced arming.
For zone pulse count time, options 0 to 7 have a zone
loop response time of 20 ms and options 8 to 15 have
a zone loop response time of 150 ms. Loop response
time is the length of time a zone must be unsealed
before it can register as a valid pulse.
15 –Zone Not Used
If a zone is not used, program the zone type location
to 15. An EOL resistor is not required if this zone
type is used. This zone type never sounds the sirens
or activates the dialer.
Inertia sensors should use options 0 to 7 and PIR
detectors should use options 8 to 15.
14.3.3
Zone Pulse Count
24-Hour Zones can receive any handover
pulses from other zones. 24-Hour Zones
cannot hand over pulses to other zones.
Zone pulse count is the number of times a zone must
be activated before the zone registers an alarm. The
number can vary from 0 to 15. The zone pulse count
value is relative to the time frame (that is, the number
of pulses that must be present during a particular
time frame). Refer to Section 14.3.4 Zone Pulse Count
Time for time frame settings.
14.3.5
Zone Options 1
This location has four programming options. You can
select any combination of the options by
programming a single value. Calculate this value by
adding the option bit numbers together. Refer to
Section 7.3 Programming Option Bits on page 36 for
more information.
A zone that is programmed with a pulse
count activates an alarm when it is
continuously unsealed for 10 sec. A 24-
Hour Fire Zone programmed with a pulse
count activates an alarm when it is
continuously unsealed for 30 sec.
Table 50: Zone Options 1
Zone Pulse Count Handover
Option Description
Zone pulse count handover operates only with Zone
Pulse Count Time options 8 to 15. Refer to Section
14.3.4 Zone Pulse Count Time for more information.
1
2
4
8
Lockout siren/lockout dialer
Delay Alarm reporting
Silent Alarm
Sensor watch
Any zone that registers one activate pulse
automatically increments any other zone pulse count
that already registered at least one activate pulse
during its respective time. To enable this feature,
select Option 4 in Location 494 (refer to Section 18.3
System Options 3 on page 81).
1 – Lockout Siren and Lockout Dialer
Lockout refers to one activation per arming cycle
(that is, a zone programmed for Lockout can activate
the sirens or dialer only once).
The next time the system is armed, the zone can
activate the sirens and dialer once more. Restore
signals are sent when the system is disarmed.
24-Hour Zones will receive all handover
pulses from other zones. 24-Hour Zones
cannot handover pulses to other zones.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 14.0
Zone Information
EN | 62
The ICP-CC488 Control Panel performs lockout
Program Locations 389 and 390 to 0 to disable
Sensor Watch Reports (refer to Section 15.5 Zone
Status – Sensor Watch Reports on page 66).
differently than other control panels because only the
first zone to activate an alarm is locked out. All other
zones that are activated during the same Siren Run
Time are reset when the sirens are reset. This
prevents an intruder from activating all zones and
waiting for the sirens to stop before re-entering the
premises.
Example
If the Sensor Watch Time is programmed for 2 days
and the premises is armed for 12 hours and disarmed
for 12 hours each day, it takes 4 days before a zone
can register a Sensor Watch fault.
Example
14.3.6
Keyswitch Zone Options
All zones are programmed for both lockout siren and
dialer. Zone 1 is activated, followed by all other
zones, which activates the sirens and causes the dialer
to report to the base station receiver. Zone 1 is the
only zone that stops reporting to the base station
receiver because the first activated zone is locked out.
The remaining zones continue to report if they are
activated again.
Table 51 on page 62 lists the options available to
Keyswitch Zones. If you program a zone as a
keyswitch input (Zone Type 11), program the
selected Keyswitch Zone options in the location
normally used for Zone Options 1. Keyswitch zones
report as User Code 16.
Table 51: Keyswitch Zone Options
Use Location 379 to set the number of times the siren
is allowed to activate before it is locked out (refer to
Section 14.4 Swinger Shutdown Count for Siren on page
64). Use Location 380 to set the number of times the
dialer is activated before lockout takes effect (refer to
Section 14.5 Swinger Shutdown Count for Dialer on page
64). ).
Option
Description
Latching arm and disarm in AWAY Mode
Latching arm in AWAY Mode
Latching disarm from AWAY Mode, STAY
Mode 1, or STAY Mode 2
Latching arm and disarm in STAY Mode 1
Latching arm in STAY Mode 1
Latching disarm from STAY Mode 1 or STAY
Mode 2
Momentary arm and disarm in AWAY Mode
Momentary arm In AWAY Mode
Momentary disarm from AWAY Mode, STAY
Mode 1, or STAY Mode 2
Momentary arm and disarm in STAY Mode 1
Momentary arm in STAY Mode 1
0
1
2
4
5
6
2 – Delay Alarm Reporting
Select this option to allow the reporting of alarms on
selected zones to be delayed so that a user can enter
a code to cancel alarms that are not required to
report. All sounding devices (horn speaker, strobe,
and bell outputs) operate as soon as the alarm occurs,
but the dialer does not operate until the delay time
programmed in Locations 474 and 475 expires (refer
to Section 17.6 Delay Alarm Reporting Time on page 78).
8
9
10
12
13
14
4 – Silent Alarm
Momentary disarm from STAY Mode 1 or
STAY Mode 2
Select this option to program a zone as silent. A silent
zone does not activate the horn speaker, bell, strobe,
or EDMSAT outputs. The dialer and all other
programmable outputs function according to the
parameters programmed for the zone.
0 – Latching Arm and Disarm in AWAY Mode
The system is armed or disarmed from AWAY Mode
when using the latching keyswitch input.
1 – Latching Arm in AWAY Mode
8 – Sensor Watch
The system is armed in AWAY Mode when using
the latching keyswitch input. Disarming the system is
not permitted from the Keyswitch Zone.
Sensor watch allows the control panel to recognize
when detection devices might have stopped working.
This feature monitors the operation of a zone over
the time period programmed in Locations 476 and
477 (refer to Section 15.5 Zone Status – Sensor Watch
Reports on page 78).
2 – Latching Disarm from AWAY Mode, STAY Mode
1, or STAY Mode 2
The system is disarmed from AWAY Mode, STAY
Mode 1, or STAY Mode 2 when using the latching
keyswitch input. Arming the system is not permitted
from the Keyswitch Zone.
This value specifies how many 24-hour periods a
zone can remain continuously sealed before it
registers as a Sensor Watch fault. The number of
hours required to fulfill these 24-hour periods is
calculated only when the system is disarmed. Every
time the system is armed in the AWAY Mode, STAY
Mode 1, or STAY Mode 2, the Sensor Watch Timer
pauses its count. The Sensor Watch Timer continues
its count the next time the system is disarmed.
4 – Latching Arm and Disarm in STAY Mode 1
The system is armed or disarmed in STAY Mode 1
when using the latching keyswitch input. Arming and
disarming the system in AWAY Mode is not
permitted from the Keyswitch Zone.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 14.0
Zone Information
EN | 63
5 – Latching Arm in STAY Mode 1
Figure 15: Wiring Diagram for Keyswitch Zone
The system is armed in STAY Mode 1 when using
the latching keyswitch input. Arming the system in
AWAY Mode or disarming the system is not
permitted from the Keyswitch Zone.
Using Split EOL with Tamper
6 – Latching Disarm from STAY Mode 1 or STAY
Mode 2
1
2
The system is disarmed from STAY Mode 1 or
STAY Mode 2 when using the latching keyswitch
input. Arming the system in STAY Mode 1 or STAY
Mode 2, or arming and disarming the system in
AWAY Mode is permitted from the Keyswitch Zone.
1 – EOL
2 – Keyswitch (Momentary/Toggle)
14.3.7 Zone Options 2
This location has four programming options. You can
select any combination of the options by
programming a single value. Calculate this value by
adding the option bit numbers together. Refer to
Section 7.3 Programming Option Bits on page 36 for
more information.
8 – Momentary Arm and Disarm in AWAY Mode
The system is armed or disarmed from AWAY Mode
when using the momentary keyswitch input.
9 – Momentary Arm in AWAY Mode
The system is armed in AWAY Mode when using
the momentary keyswitch input. Disarming the
system is not permitted from the Keyswitch Zone.
Table 52: Zone Options 2
Option Description
10 – Momentary Disarm from AWAY Mode, STAY
Mode 1, or STAY Mode 2
1
2
4
8
Isolate in STAY Mode 1
Zone Isolation Allowed
Forced Arming Allowed
Zone Restore Report
The system is disarmed from either AWAY Mode,
STAY Mode 1, or STAY Mode 2 when using the
momentary keyswitch input. Arming the system is
not permitted from the Keyswitch Zone.
1 – Isolate in STAY Mode 1
If this option is selected, the zone can be
automatically isolated when the system is armed in
STAY Mode 1.
12 – Momentary Arm and Disarm in STAY Mode 1
The system is armed or disarmed in STAY Mode 1
when using the momentary keyswitch input. Arming
and disarming the system in AWAY Mode is not
permitted from the Keyswitch Zone.
If this option is not selected and the system is armed
in STAY Mode 1, the zone activates an alarm when
activated as it normally would in AWAY Mode.
13 – Momentary Arm in STAY Mode 1
You can specify a global entry time for all zones,
except for 24-Hour Zones, when the system is armed
in STAY Mode 1. You program this time in
Locations 472 and 473 (refer to Section 17.5 Entry
Guard Timer for STAY Mode on page 78). The Entry
Guard Timer overrides the delay time programmed
for a Delay Zone. If you program the Entry Guard
Timer as 0, each zone acts according to its
programmed zone type.
The system is armed in STAY Mode 1 when using
the momentary keyswitch input. Arming the system
in AWAY Mode or disarming the system is not
permitted from the Keyswitch Zone.
14 – Momentary Disarm from STAY Mode 1 or
STAY Mode 2
The system is disarmed from STAY Mode 1 or
STAY Mode 2 when using the momentary keyswitch
input. Arming the system in STAY Mode 1 or STAY
Mode 2, or arming and disarming the system from
AWAY Mode is not permitted from the Keyswitch
Zone.
Refer to Section 3.3 Arming the System in STAY Mode 1
on page 14 for more information.
2 – Zone Isolation Allowed
If this option is selected, the operator can isolate the
zone before arming the system. If this option is not
selected, the zone cannot be manually isolated.
When a zone is manually isolated, a Zone Bypass
Report (Contact ID Event Code 570) is sent. Refer to
Section 3.11 Isolating Zones on page 17 for more
information.
Figure 14: Wiring Diagram for Keyswitch Zone
2
1
1 – EOL
2 – Keyswitch (Momentary/Toggle)
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 14.0
Zone Information
EN | 64
When isolating 24-Hour Zones, the system
Only alarms activated from zone inputs can
decrement the Swinger Shutdown Counter. Alarms
zone is selected to be isolated. All non-24-Hour zones such as Codepad Panic, Access Denied, and other
automatically sends a Zone Bypass Report when the
send a Bypass Report only when the system is
armed.
system alarms do not affect the Swinger Shutdown
Count.
If you do not want the system to report Zone Bypass
Reports, program Locations 385 and 386 to 0 (refer
When the sirens are operating, the Swinger
Shutdown Counter is decremented only by the first
to Section 15.3 Zone Status – Bypass Reports on page 65). zone that activated the alarm. Any other zones
activated during Siren Run Time do not affect the
counter.
4 – Forced Arming Allowed
If this option is selected, the system can be armed
When the Swinger Shutdown Count is reached, all
with the zone unsealed. If this option is not selected,
zones that were activated are locked out according to
the system does not allow the User Code holder to
their individual lockout settings.
arm the system until the zone is sealed or manually
isolated. Refer to Section 3.11 Isolating Zones on page
Example
17 for more information.
All eight zones are programmed for lockout siren
with a Swinger Shutdown Count of 3. If Zone 1
activates an alarm, the Swinger Shutdown Count is
decremented by one after the end of Siren Run Time
to a swinger shutdown count of 2.
8 – Zone Restore Report
If this option is selected, the zone sends Restore
Reports when the zone is restored. If this option is
not selected, the zone does not send Restore Reports
when the zone is restored.
After the Siren Run Time is reset from the previous
alarm, Zone 2 activates an alarm and activates the
sirens. After the sirens are reset, the swinger
shutdown count is decremented again to 1.
If a non-24-Hour zone is not restored when the
system is disarmed, the system automatically sends a
Zone Restore Report for that zone. All 24-Hour
zones send a Zone Restore Report only when the
zone is restored.
If Zone 3 also activates an alarm after the sirens are
reset from Zone 2, the Swinger Shutdown Count is
decremented to 0, which locks out all three zones
from sounding the sirens until the system is reset.
14.3.8
Zone Report Code
If you want the control panel to transmit Zone Alarm
Reports, program this location as 1. If not, program
this location as 0.
At this point, the Swinger Shutdown Count for Sirens
is reset to 3 and the process of swinger shutdown for
remaining zones begins again until all zones are
locked out.
14.3.9
Zone Dialer Options
By default, a zone reports only to Receiver 1. Table
53 on page 64 lists the reporting options for the zone.
If the ICP-CC488 Control Panel is
partitioned, the Swinger Shutdown Count
for Siren applies to both Area 1 and
Area 2.
Table 53: Zone Dialer Options
Option Description
14.5 Swinger Shutdown Count for Dialer
0
1
2
4
8
No report required
Receiver 1
Receiver 2
Receiver 1 and Receiver 2
Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1 fails
380
Location
6
Default
1 to 15 Number of times dialer operates until lockout
Location 380 determines the number of times the
dialer can be activated before lockout options take
effect. This location has no effect unless you program
at least one zone for lockout dialer. Refer to Section
14.3.5 Zone Options 1 on page 61 to program zones
for lockout dialer.
14.4 Swinger Shutdown Count for Siren
379
Location
3
Default
1 to 15 Number of times siren operates until lockout
Only alarms activated from zone inputs can
decrement the Swinger Shutdown Counter. Alarms
such as Codepad Panic, Code Retries, and other
system alarms do not affect the Swinger Shutdown
Count.
Location 379 determines the number of times the
sirens can be activated before lockout options take
effect. This location has no effect unless you program
at least one zone for lockout siren. Refer to Section
14.3.5 Zone Options 1 on page 61 to program zones
for lockout siren.
When the dialer is online, its counter is decremented
only by the first zone that activated the alarm. Any
other zones activated while the dialer is online do not
affect the counter.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 15.0
System Reporting Information
EN | 65
When the Swinger Shutdown Count is reached, all
zones that were activated are locked out according to
their individual lockout settings.
15.2 Zone Status – Walk Test Report
383 to 384
Location
Location
383
384
Default
If Lockout Dialer is enabled for any zone,
the last restore signal is not transmitted
until the system is disarmed.
Walk Test Report
Walk Test Restore Report
0
0
A Walk Test Report (Contact ID Event Code 607) is
sent when either the Installer or Master Code holder
activates Walk Test Mode (refer to Section 5.1.8 on
page 26 or Section 5.2.9 on page 31 for more
information).
If the ICP-CC488 Control Panel is
partitioned, the Swinger Shutdown Count
for Dialer applies to both Area 1 and
Area 2.
To enable Walk Test and Walk Test Restore Reports,
program the two locations with any digit from 1 to
15.
Example
All eight zones are programmed for lockout dialer
with a Swinger Shutdown Count of 6. If Zone 1
activates an alarm, the Swinger Shutdown Count
decrements to 5 when the control panel calls.
15.3 Zone Status – Bypass Reports
385 to 386
Location
If Zone 1 reactivates the dialer, the Swinger
Shutdown Count is decremented by to 4. If Zone 1
reactivates the dialer three more times, the Swinger
Shutdown Count is 1.
Location
385
386
Default
Zone Bypass Report
Zone Bypass Restore Report
9
8
A zone is bypassed when it is manually isolated.
Refer to Section 3.11 Isolating Zones on page 17 for
information on isolating zones. A Zone Bypass
Report (Contact ID Event Code 573) is sent at the
end of Exit Time for any zone that was manually
isolated. A 24-Hour Zone sends a Zone Bypass
Report when the zone is selected to be isolated.
If Zone 2 activates an alarm, the Swinger Shutdown
Count is decremented to 0, which locks out Zone 2
from activating the dialer until the system is reset. At
this point, the Swinger Shutdown Count for the
Dialer is reset to 6 and the process of swinger
shutdown for the remaining zones, including Zone 1,
begins again until all zones are locked out.
A Zone Bypass Restore Report is sent when the
system is disarmed. All bypassed zones are
automatically cleared when the system is disarmed.
15.0 System Reporting
Information
This section covers features that are involved with
basic housekeeping of the system. These include
monitoring of the zones, whether they are isolated
from the system or are actually operating, the status
of the AC MAINS and DC power to the system, and
codepad-generated alarms activated by the user.
The Bypass code parameter has no effect on Contact
ID Format because a Zone Bypass is always reported
as Event Code 570.
If Zone Bypass Reports are not required,
program Locations 385 and 386 as 0.
A 24-Hour Burglary Zone that is manually
bypassed reports as Contact ID Event
Code 572.
15.1 Zone Status – Zone Tamper Report
A 24-Hour Fire Zone that is manually
bypassed reports as Contact ID Event
Code 571.
381 to 382
Location
Location
381
382
Default
Zone Tamper Report
Zone Tamper Restore Report
0
0
15.4 Zone Status – Trouble Reports
A Zone Tamper Report (Contact ID Event Code
144) is sent when Option 14 is programmed in
Location 266 (refer to Section 14.2 EOL Resistor Value
on page 56) and the zone loop using split EOL
resistors (3K3/6K8) with tamper (1K) becomes open
circuit.
387 to 388
Location
Location
387
388
Default
Zone Trouble Report
Zone Trouble Restore Report
2
3
A zone is in trouble when it is unsealed at the end of
Exit Time. A Sensor Trouble Report (Contact ID
Event Code 380) is sent to indicate that one or more
zones were automatically isolated by the system. 24-
Hour Zones that are unsealed at the end of Exit Time
do not transmit a Sensor Trouble Report because the
restoral for that zone is still outstanding.
To enable Zone Tamper and Zone Tamper
Restore Reports, program the two locations with
any digit from 1 to 15.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 15.0
System Reporting Information
EN | 66
A Sensor Trouble Restore Report is sent for Burglary
Zones when the zone is resealed or the next time the
system is disarmed (whichever happens first). A 24-
Hour Zone sends a restore signal only when it is
resealed.
15.7 Zone Status Reporting Options
392
Location
0
1
2
4
8
No zone status reports allowed
Report to Receiver 1
Report to Receiver 2
Report to both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2
Report to Receiver 2 only if Receiver 1 fails
The Trouble code parameter has no effect on
Contact ID Format because a Sensor Trouble Report
is always reported as Event Code 380.
This location is set by default to report only to
Receiver 1. You can select whether Zone Status
Reports are sent to Receiver 1, Receiver 2, or both,
Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1 fails, or no
reporting.
If Sensor Trouble Reports are not
required, program Locations 387 and 388
as 0.
For a partitioned ICP-CC488 Control Panel, this
location is ignored if Option 1 is selected in Location
501 (refer to Section 19.3.2 Partitioning Options 2 on
page 85).
15.5 Zone Status – Sensor Watch
Reports
389 to 390
Location
Location
389
Default
15.8 RF Supervision Time
Sensor Watch Report
4
5
Sensor Watch Restore Report
390
393
Location
Default
0
0
A Self Test Failure Report (Contact ID Event Code
307) is sent to the base station receiver when a zone
was not activated during the Sensor Watch Time
programmed in Locations 476 and 477 (refer to
Section 15.5 Zone Status – Sensor Watch Reports on
page 78). This report continues to be sent (according
to the frequency of the Sensor Watch Time) until the
fault is corrected.
Disable RF Supervision Time Reports
1 to 15 Increments of 6 hours (0 to 90 hours)
An RF Supervision Failure Report (Contact ID Event
Code 307) is sent to the base station receiver when
the wireless receiver has not received a signal from
any RF wireless zone during the RF Supervision
Time. This report continues to be sent (according to
the frequency of the RF Supervision Time) until the
fault is corrected.
To clear the fault and stop any additional reporting,
you must unseal and reseal the zone that registered
the fault. Use the Sensor Watch Time in Locations
476 and 477 to set the number of days a zone can
remain sealed without registering a fault. Refer to
Section 14.3.5 Zone Options 1 on page 61 to select
zones to be monitored by the Sensor Watch feature.
To clear the fault and stop additional reporting:
Unseal and reseal the zone that registered the fault.
Refer to Section 3.13 Fault Descriptions on page 18 for
more information.
If RF Supervision Failure Reports are not
required, program Location 393 as 0.
If Self Test Failure Reports are not
required, program Locations 389 and 390
as 0.
15.9 RF Low Battery Report
15.6 Zone Status – Alarm Restore Code
394 to 395
Location
391
Location
Location
394
Default
14
Default
RF Low Battery Report
6
8
If Zone Alarm Restore Reports are required,
program this location as 14. If not, program this
location as 0.
RF Low Battery Restore Report
395
An RF Low Battery Report (Contact ID Event Code
384) is sent to the base station receiver when the
battery voltage on a wireless zone falls below
approximately 2.4 VDC. An RF Low Battery Restore
Report is sent on the first valid signal after the
battery is replaced.
Location 392 (Section 15.7 Zone Status Reporting Options
on page 66) is ignored when programming the Alarm
Restore code and is global for all zones. A zone
Restore Report is sent only to the receiving party to
which the zone is allocated (for example, Receiver 1
or Receiver 2).
15.10 RF Receiver Trouble Report
396 to 397
Location
Location
396
397
Default
Tens digit
Units digit
7
9
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 15.0
System Reporting Information
EN | 67
An RF Receiver Trouble Report (Contact ID Event
Code 355) is sent to the base station receiver when
the RF receiver registers one of these events:
If Open and Close Reports are not
required, program Locations 401 and 402
as 0.
RF Signal Jamming (Point ID Code 001)
RF Receiver Tamper Switch (Point ID Code 002)
RF Receiver Failure (Point ID Code 003)
A partitioned ICP-CC488 Control Panel
sends Open/Close Reports with Contact
ID Event Code 402.
15.11 RF Receiver Trouble Restore
Report
15.14 Open/Close Reporting Options
403
Location
398 to 399
Location
0
1
2
4
8
No Open/Close Reports allowed
Report to Receiver 1
Report to Receiver 2
Report to both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2
Report to Receiver 2 only if Receiver 1 fails
Location
398
399
Default
Tens digit
Units digit
7
11
An RF Receiver Trouble Restore Report is sent to
the base station receiver when the RF receiver no
longer registers RF Signal Jamming, RF Receiver
Tamper Switch, or RF Receiver Failure.
Location 403 is set by default to report only to
Receiver 1. You can select whether Open and Close
Reports are sent to Receiver 1, Receiver 2, or both,
Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1 fails, or no
reporting.
15.12 RF Dialer Options
400
Location
0
1
2
4
8
No report allowed
Report to Receiver 1
Report to Receiver 2
Report to both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2
Report to Receiver 2 only if Receiver 1 fails
15.15 Codepad Duress Report
404
Location
6
Default
A Duress Report (Contact ID Event Code 121) is
sent to the base station receiver when 9 is added to
the end of any valid User Code used to disarm the
system. This alarm is always silent. A Duress Alarm
can be activated during Exit Time. In other words, if
the system is armed and then disarmed by adding 9
to the end of the User Code before Exit Time
expires, a Codepad Duress Report is transmitted.
Adding 9 to the end of a User Code when arming the
system does not cause a Duress Alarm.
Location 400 is set by default to report only to
Receiver 1. You can select whether Zone Status
Reports are sent to Receiver 1, Receiver 2, or both,
Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1 fails, or there is no
reporting at all.
15.13 Open/Close Reports
Location
401 to 402
Location
401
402
Default
11
If you want a 3 to activate a Codepad Duress Alarm
instead of 9, select Option 2 in Location 498 (refer to
Section 18.7 Consumer Options 3 on page 83).
Open Report
Close Report
12
An Opening Report (Contact ID Event Code 401) is
sent to the base station receiver when the system is
disarmed from AWAY Mode. A Closing Report
(Contact ID Event Code 401) is sent at the end of
Exit Time when the system is armed in AWAY
Mode.
Restore Reports are not sent for this
event.
If Codepad Duress Reports are not
required, program Location 404 as 0.
15.16 Codepad Panic Report
If an expanded format is selected, this code is used as
the Expansion Code and the user number that armed
or disarmed the system follows in the same
transmission.
405 to 406
Location
Location
405
406
Default
Tens digit
Units digit
7
15
To enable Open and Close Reports in STAY
Mode:
A Panic Alarm Report (Contact ID Event Code 120)
is sent to the base station receiver when a user
presses either [1] and [3] or [STAY] and [AWAY] at
the same time. A Panic Alarm is audible, but you can
program the alarm as silent by selecting Option 1 in
Location 493 (refer to Section 18.2 System Options 2 on
page 81).
Select Option 2 in Location 178 (refer to Section 12.2
Dialer Options 2 on page 53). To enable Open and
Close Reports only after a previous alarm, select
Option 1 in Location 178.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 15.0
Restore Reports are not sent for this
System Reporting Information
EN | 68
15.20 System Status – AUX Power
Supply Fail Report
event.
412 to 413
Location
If Codepad Panic Reports are not
required, program Locations 405 and 406
as 0.
Location
412
413
Default
Tens digit
Units digit
10
3
15.17 Codepad Fire Report
A System Trouble Report (Contact ID Event Code
300) is sent when either the codepad AUX power
supply is blown or the AUX power supply
malfunctions. The system reports the event
approximately 10 sec after the failure.
407 to 408
Location
Location
407
408
Default
Tens digit
Units digit
7
14
A Fire Alarm Report (Contact ID Event Code 110) is
sent to the base station receiver when a user presses
[4] and [6] at the same time. A Fire Alarm is audible,
but you can program the alarm as silent by selecting
Option 2 in Location 493 (refer to Section 18.2 System
Options 2 on page 81). A distinct fire sound is emitted
through the horn speaker to indicate this type of
alarm. The fire sound is different than the burglary
sound.
15.21 System Status – AUX Power
Supply Fail Restore Report
Location 414 to 415
Location
414
415
Default
Tens digit
Units digit
10
8
A System Trouble Restore Report (Contact ID Event
Code 300) is sent when the AUX power supply is
reset. The system reports the event approximately 10
sec after power supply is reset.
Restore Reports are not sent for this
event.
If Codepad Fire Reports are not required,
program Locations 407 and 408 as 0.
15.22 System Status – AC Fail Report
416 to 417
Location
Location
416
417
Default
15.18 Codepad Medical Report
Tens digit
Units digit
10
2
409 to 410
Location
Location
409
410
Default
An AC Fail Report (Contact ID Event Code 301) is
sent to the base station receiver when the AC
MAINS supply is disconnected for 2 min. If you do
not want an AC Fail Report to be sent until the AC
MAINS supply is disconnected for 1 hour, select
Option 1 in Location 494 (refer to Section 18.3 System
Options 3 on page 81). If you want to ignore AC Fail,
select Option 2 in Location 494.
Tens digit
Units digit
7
13
A Medical Report (Contact ID Event Code 100) is
sent to the base station receiver when a user presses
[7] and [9] at the same time. A Medical Alarm is
audible, but you can program the alarm as silent by
selecting Option 4 in Location 493 (refer to Section
18.2 System Options 2 on page 81).
Restore Reports are not sent for this
event.
If AC Fail Reports are not required,
program Locations 416 and 417 as 0.
If Codepad Medical Reports are not
required, program Locations 409 and 410
as 0.
15.23 System Status – AC Fail Restore
Report
416 to 417
Location
15.19 Codepad Reporting Options
Location
416
417
Default
411
Location
Tens digit
Units digit
10
7
0
1
2
4
8
No Codepad Alarm Reports allowed
Report to Receiver 1
Report to Receiver 2
Report to both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2
Report to Receiver 2 only if Receiver 1 fails
An AC Fail Restore Report is sent when the AC
MAINS supply is connected continuously for longer
than 2 min.
Location 411 is set by default to report only to
Receiver 1. You can select whether Codepad Alarm
Reports are sent to Receiver 1, Receiver 2, or both,
Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1 fails, or no
reporting.
If AC Fail Restore Reports are not
required, program Locations 418 and 419
as 0.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 15.0
System Reporting Information
EN | 69
Code Retries
15.24 System Status – Low Battery
Report
The Code Retries feature restricts the number of
times an invalid User Code can be entered in an
420 to 421
Location
attempt to operate the system. Location 424 sets the
number of incorrect code attempts that causes an
alarm. When the number of incorrect code attempts
equals the number programmed in this location, the
system performs these actions:
Location
420
421
Default
Tens digit
Units digit
10
1
A Battery Test Failure Report (Contact ID Event
Code 309) is sent to the base station receiver when
the system’s battery voltage falls below 11.2 VDC or
when a Dynamic Battery Test detects a low capacity
battery.
•
Activates the sirens, internal screamers, and
strobes connected to the control panel. Select
Option 8 in Location 493 (refer to Section 18.2
System Options 2 on page 81) to change this alarm
to silent.
The control panel continually monitors the battery
voltage. Refer to Section 3.13 Fault Descriptions on
page 18 for more information. A Dynamic Battery
Test is done every time the system is armed and
every 4 hours after the control panel is powered up.
•
•
Shuts down all codepads connected to the
control panel and locks them out for the time
period programmed in Location 478 (refer to
Section 17.8 Codepad Lockout Time).
Sends an Access Denied Report (Contact ID
Event Code 421) to the base station receiver.
If Low Battery Reports are not required,
program Locations 420 and 421 as 0.
Each time the system is armed or disarmed, the Code
Retries counter is reset. You can program the counter
to a value from 1 to 15. If you want the number of
incorrect code attempts to be unlimited, program a 0
in Location 424. In this case, the Access Denied
Report is never generated and the system does not
perform the three actions listed above. This function
works when the system is armed or disarmed.
15.25 System Status – Low Battery
Restore Report
422 to 423
Location
Location
422
423
Default
Tens digit
Units digit
10
6
A Low Battery Restore Report is sent if the backup
battery is restored the next time the system is armed,
or when the next Dynamic Battery Test reports the
battery test is OK.
15.27 System Status Reporting Options
427
Location
0
1
2
4
8
No report allowed
Report to Receiver 1
Report to Receiver 2
Report to both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2
Report to Receiver 2 only if Receiver 1 fails
If Low Battery Restore Reports are not
required, program Locations 422 and 423
as 0.
Location 427 is set by default to report only to
Receiver 1. You can select whether System Status
Reports are sent to Receiver 1, Receiver 2, or both,
Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1 fails, or no
reporting.
15.26 System Status – Access Denied
424 to 426
Location
Location
Default
Code Retry Limit
(0 = Unlimited)
424
6
Tens Digit
Units Digit
425
426
7
12
15.28 Test Reporting Time
428 to 434
Location
An Access Denied Report (Contact ID Event Code
421) is sent to the base station receiver when the
number of incorrect code attempts equals the
number programmed in Location 424. An Access
Denied Alarm is audible, but you can program the
alarm as silent by selecting Option 8 in Location 493
(refer to Section 18.2 System Options 2 on page 81).
Location
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
Default
Hour of day (tens digit)
Hour of day (units digit)
Minute of day (tens digit)
Minute of day (units digit)
Test Report (tens digit)
Test Report (units digit)
Repeat interval in days
0
0
0
0
7
1
0
Restore Reports for this event are not
transmitted.
A Test Report (Contact ID Event Code 602) is a
specific signal sent to the base station receiver and is
normally used to test the dialing and reporting
functions of the control panel.
If Access Denied Reports are not
required, program Locations 424 and 425
as 0.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 16.0
Programmable Outputs
EN | 70
When programming Test Report options, specify the
hour and minute of the day the report is required,
and how often to send the report. Test reports are
reported on a daily basis from every day to every
fifteen days. Refer to Section 5.1.2 Set the Number of
Days until the First Test Report to set the first test
report.
Table 54: Output Parameters
Parameter
Description
Event Type
The Event Type specifies when an output
is activated. The Output Event Types are
listed in Section 16.2 on page 71 . Enter
the code for the Output Event Type into
the two corresponding locations for the
output.
If Test Reports are not required, program
the repeat interval in Location 434 as 0.
Polarity
Polarity determines whether the output
operates for the duration of the event,
pulses for the duration, operates only
once (one shot), or latches on. The
Polarity options are listed in Table 56 on
page 76.
The Time Base and Time Multiplier
parameters determine how long and how
often the output operates. Refer to
Section 16.4 Output Timing.
Program the Test Report Time as 24:00
to send reports every 30 min.
Example
If you want to send Test Reports once every seven
days at 11:35 PM, program Locations 428 to 429 as:
Time Base/
Time
Multiplier
[2 3 3 5 7 1 7]
15.29 Test Reporting Dialer Options
435
Location
0
1
2
4
8
No report allowed
Report to Receiver 1
Report to Receiver 2
Report to both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2
Report to Receiver 2 only if Receiver 1 fails
436 to 465
Location
Location
Default
Output 1 (Default – Horn
Speaker)
Event Code 436
Event Code 437
Polarity 438
1
14
0
0
0
Location 435 is set by default to report only to
Receiver 1. You can select whether Test Reports are
sent to Receiver 1, Receiver 2, or both, Receiver 2
only when Receiver 1 fails, or no reporting.
Time Base 439
Time Base Multiplier 440
Time Base Multiplier 441
Output 2 (Default – Fire Alarm With Verification)
Event Code 442
0
16.0 Programmable Outputs
2
7
10
2
1
5
Event Code 443
The ICP-CC488 Control Panel has four fully-
programmable outputs on the main printed circuit
board and one programmable output that operates
the codepad buzzer. The four outputs are set by
default to operate as horn speaker, fire alarm
verification, strobe, and internal screamer.
Polarity 444
Time Base 445
Time Base Multiplier 446
Time Base Multiplier 447
Strobe Output (Default – Strobe – Reset After 8 hrs.)
Event Code 448
Event Code 449
2
Programmable outputs require four parameters to
operate correctly.
0
6
4
0
8
Polarity 450
Time Base 451
Time Base Multiplier 452
Time Base Multiplier 453
Relay Output (Default – Sirens Running)
Event Code 454
1
15
1
Event Code 455
Polarity 456
Time Base 457
0
Time Base Multiplier 458
Time Base Multiplier 459
0
0
Codepad Buzzer (Default – Entry/Exit Warning and Day
Alarm)
Event Code 460
0
Event Code 461
Polarity 462
13
2
Time Base 463
1
Time Base Multiplier 464
Time Base Multiplier 465
0
1
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 16.0
Programmable Outputs
0,3 Armed in STAY Mode
EN | 71
16.1 Redirecting Outputs to the
Codepad Buzzer
Multiple output event types can be directed to the
codepad buzzer so that the buzzer can indicate a
number of events.
This output operates when the system is armed in
STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2. The output is reset
when the system is disarmed. If the system is
partitioned, this output operates when either area is
armed in STAY Mode 1.
To redirect an output to the codepad buzzer, select
an output and program it for the desired Output
Event Type. If the output is functioning correctly,
add 8 to the first (tens) digit of the Output Event
Type.
0,4
Armed in AWAY Mode
This output operates when the system is armed in
AWAY Mode. The output is reset when the system is
disarmed. If the system is partitioned, this output
operates when either area is armed in AWAY Mode.
Example
0,5
Auto Arm Pre-Arming Alert Time
3,0 Communications Failure
This output operates during the time period before
the control panel is automatically armed in AWAY
Mode or STAY Mode 1. The output is reset when
the control panel is automatically armed in AWAY
Mode or STAY Mode 1. The Auto Arming Pre-Alert
Time is programmed in Location 481 (refer to Section
17.11 for more information).
This event operates after the dialer makes all possible
attempts to reach the base station receiver. It is reset
when the panel receives the first Kiss-off. This
Output Event Type is not applicable to domestic
reporting.
To redirect this Output Event Type to operate a
codepad buzzer, program the Output Event Type as:
0,6
Exit Warning with All Zones Sealed or
11,0 Communications Failure
Entry Warning
The codepad buzzer operates instead of the output
that was programmed. Output 3 is no longer
functional and cannot be used for any other Output
Event Type.
This output operates during Exit Time when the
control panel is armed and all zones are sealed. The
output is reset when Exit Time expires.
This output operates again during Entry Time and is
reset when Entry Time expires or the system is
disarmed.
16.2 Output Event Types
There are approximately 75 Output Event Types.
Two numbers designate each Output Event Type.
Program these numbers into the appropriate
locations for the output.
This output also operates if a zone is activated when
the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY
Mode 2 and the Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode
is programmed in Locations 472 and 473 (refer to
Section 17.5 on page 78).
All reset times reference Polarity 1 and 8.
Reset times vary depending on the
selected polarity.
0,7
Exit Warning
This output operates during Exit Time when the
system is armed. The output is reset when Exit Time
expires.
0,0
EDMSAT - Satellite Siren (Output 1 Only)
This output controls all functions of the SS914
Satellite Siren (EDMSAT). The Speaker Indication
Beeps option does not function through the satellite
siren for remote operations. No polarity is required
for this Output Event Type.
0,8
Exit Warning Finished
This output operates after Exit Time expires when
the system is armed. The output is reset when the
system is disarmed.
0,1
System Armed
0,9
Kiss-Off after Exit Time
This output operates when the system is armed. The
output is reset when the system is disarmed. If the
system is partitioned, this output operates when both
areas are armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1.
This output operates after the first successful
transmission to the base station receiver when Exit
Time expires. The output is reset when the system is
disarmed.
0,2
System Disarmed
0,11
Entry Warning
This output operates when the system is disarmed.
The output is reset when the system is armed. If the
system is partitioned, this output operates when both
areas are disarmed.
This output operates when during Entry Timer 1,
Entry Timer 2, or Entry Guard Timer for STAY
Mode. The output is reset when the Entry Time
expires.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 16.0
Programmable Outputs
EN | 72
0,12
Entry Warning + Day Alarm Resetting
1,0
Day Alarm Enabled
This output combines Entry Warning and Day Alarm This output operates when Day Alarm is enabled.
Resetting so that either of these two events activates
the output.
The output is reset when Day Alarm is turned off.
Refer to Section 14.1 Day Alarm Information on page 56
for programming zones to operate for Day Alarm.
If the output is activated by Entry Timer 1, Entry
Timer 2, or Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode, the
output is reset when the Entry Time expires or the
system is disarmed.
You can turn Day Alarm on and off by holding
down [4]. Three beeps indicate that Day Alarm is
turned on, two beeps indicate that Day Alarm is
turned off. Refer to Section 5.4.7 Turning Day Alarm On
and Off on page 33 for more information.
If a zone programmed for Day Alarm is activated
when the system is disarmed, the output is reset
when the zone is resealed. You can turn Day Alarm
on and off by holding down [4]. Refer to Section 14.1
Day Alarm Information for programming zones to
operate for Day Alarm.
1,1
Telephone Line Fail
This output operates when the built-in telephone line
fault module detects that the telephone line is
disconnected longer than 40 sec. The output is reset
when the telephone line is restored continuously for
40 sec. This output does not operate unless Option 1
in Location 176 is selected (refer to Section 11.11
Telephone Line Fault Options on page 52).
0,13
Exit Warning + Entry Warning + Day Alarm
Resetting
This output operates when the system is armed,
regardless of whether zones are sealed or unsealed,
until Exit Time expires.
1,2
Kiss-off Received
The output operates again during Entry Time and is
reset when Entry Time expires or the system is
disarmed. The output also operates during the Entry
Guard Timer for STAY Mode time.
This output operates after the control panel
successfully transmitted to the receiving party.
1,3
AUX Power Supply Fail
This output operates when either the 1 A codepad
AUX power supply or the 1 A accessories AUX
power supply fails. The output is reset when the
faulty AUX power supply is reset.
If a zone programmed for day alarm is activated
when the system is disarmed, the output is reset
when the zone is resealed. You can turn Day Alarm
on and off by holding down [4]. Refer to Section 14.1
Day Alarm Information for programming zones to
operate for Day Alarm.
1,4
AC Fail
This output operates when the AC MAINS fails. The
output is reset when the AC MAINS is restored. This
output operates regardless of whether Option 2 in
Location 494 is selected (refer to Section 18.3 System
Options 3 on page 81).
0,14
Day Alarm Resetting
This output operates when a zone programmed for
Day Alarm is activated. The output is reset when the
Day Alarm zone is resealed. You can turn Day
Alarm on and off by holding down [4]. Refer to
Section 14.1 Day Alarm Information for programming
zones to operate for Day Alarm.
1,5
Low Battery
This output operates when a Dynamic Battery Test
detects the battery failed or the battery voltage is
below 11.2 VDC. The Dynamic Battery Test is
performed every 4 hours after the system is powered
up and every time the system is armed.
0,15
Day Alarm Latching
This output operates when a zone programmed for
Day Alarm is activated. The output is reset by
pressing [AWAY]. You can turn Day Alarm on and
off by holding down [4]. Refer to Section 14.1 Day
Alarm Information on page 56 for programming zones
to operate for Day Alarm.
This output is reset only after a Dynamic Battery Test
reports that the backup battery voltage is normal.
1,6
Horn Speaker Monitor Fail
If the Enable Monitoring of Horn Speaker option (2)
in Location 492 is selected (refer to Section 18.1 System
Options 1 on page 80), this output operates when the
horn speaker is disconnected. The output is reset
when the horn speaker is reconnected.
If the ICP-CC488 Control Panel is partitioned,
pressing [AWAY] on a CP5 Area Addressable
codepad other than the one to which the zone is
allocated, or pressing [AWAY] on a CP5 Master
Partitioned Codepad does not reset the output. You
can reset only this output on the area codepad to
which the zone is allocated.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 16.0
1,7 Sensor Watch Alarm
Programmable Outputs
EN | 73
1,14
Horn Speaker (Output 1 Only)
This output operates when the Sensor Watch Count
is reached. Refer to Section 14.3.5 Zone Options 1 on
page 61 for more information on programming zones
for sensor watch. Refer to Section 15.5 Zone Status –
Sensor Watch Reports on page 78 for setting the
number of days before a zone registers as a faulty
sensor watch zone.
This output operates only on Output 1. Use this
output for one or two 8 Ω horn speakers. Refer to
Section 17.9 Siren Run Time and Section 17.10 Siren
Sound Rate to program the speaker.
To enable monitoring of the horn speaker, select
Option 2 in Location 492 (refer to Section 18.1 System
Options 1 on page 80).
1,8
Codepad Medical Alarm
1,15
Sirens Running
This output operates when a user activates a
Codepad Medical Alarm by pressing [7] and [9] at
the same time on the remote codepad. This output is
reset when a valid User Code is entered at the
remote codepad.
This output operates for the duration of the Siren
Run Time programmed in Location 479 (refer to
Section 17.9 Siren Run Time). When the sirens are
activated, this output is reset when the Siren Run
Time expires. The relay output (Output 4) is set by
default for this operation.
1,9
Codepad Fire Alarm
This output operates when a user activates a
Codepad Medical Alarm by pressing [4] and [6] at
the same time on the remote codepad. This output is
reset when a valid User Code is entered at the
remote codepad.
2,0
Strobe Operating
This output operates when an alarm occurs and is
reset when a valid User Code is entered. The strobe
output (Output 3) is set by default for strobe
operation and is programmed to reset automatically
after 8 hours.
1,10
Codepad Panic Alarm
This output operates when a user activates a
Codepad Panic Alarm (audible or silent) by pressing
either [1] and [3] or [STAY] and [AWAY] at the
same time on the remote codepad. This output is
reset when a valid User Code is entered at the
remote codepad.
2,1
Silent Alarm
This output operates when any zone programmed to
be silent activates. The output is reset when the Siren
Run Time expires, an audible alarm is activated, or a
valid User Code is entered.
2,2
Alarm When in STAY Mode
1,11
Codepad Duress Alarm
This output operates when an audible or silent alarm
zone is activated when the system is armed in STAY
Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2. The output is reset when
the system is disarmed.
This output operates when a user activates a Duress
Alarm by adding a 9 to the end of the User Code
used to disarm the system. This output is reset the
next time the system is armed.
2,3
Alarm When in AWAY Mode
1,12
Codepad Tamper – Access Denied
This output operates when an audible or silent zone
alarm is activated when the system is armed in
AWAY Mode. The output is reset when the system is
disarmed.
This output operates when the wrong code is entered
more times than allowed. The number of incorrect
attempts allowed is programmed in Location 424
(refer to Section 15.26 System Status – Access Denied on
page 69). This output is reset when a valid User Code
is entered.
2,4
Mimic System Fault
This output operates without time delays when any
system fault occurs, including an AC MAINS supply
failure. The output is reset when the system fault or
the AC MAINS supply is restored.
1,13
Speaker Beeps
This output functions during all remote radio or
keyswitch operations, which allows you to install a 12
VDC buzzer or light as a status indicator. The
identification beeps are defined in Table 55.
2,5
Fire Alarm Resetting
This output operates when a 24-Hour Fire Zone is
activated. The output is reset when a valid User
Code is entered or when Siren Run Time expires.
Table 55: Horn Speaker Beeps
2,6
Fire Alarm Latching
No of Beeps
System Status
System disarmed
System armed in AWAY Mode
System armed in STAY Mode 1
This output operates when a 24-Hour Fire Zone is
activated and is reset when the system is armed or
disarmed.
1
2
3
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 16.0
2,7 Fire Alarm Verification
Programmable Outputs
EN | 74
2,13
Radio Control Output 1 – Not in AWAY
Mode
This feature is used on some commercial fire control
panels to reduce false alarms from smoke detectors.
It is similar to zone pulse count used in some motion
detectors. A fire zone is allotted a pulse count of 3
pulses over a period of 3 min.
This output operates when the [DOOR] button on
the 4-channel hand-held transmitter is activated when
the system is disarmed or armed in STAY Mode 1 or
STAY Mode 2. The output does not operate when
the system is armed in AWAY Mode.
If the smoke detector trips, the voltage to the smoke
detector is disconnected for 15 sec and then
reapplied. No alarm is registered.
2,14
Radio Control Output 2 – Not in AWAY
Mode
If the unit activates again within 3 min of the first
activation, no alarm is registered and the voltage to
the smoke detector is again disconnected for 15 sec
and then reapplied.
This output operates when the [AUX] button on the
4-channel hand-held transmitter is activated when the
system is disarmed or armed in STAY Mode 1 or
STAY Mode 2. The output does not operate when
the system is armed in AWAY Mode.
If a third activation is detected within 3 min of the
first activation, (three pulses in 3 min) a fire alarm is
If you select Option 8 in Location 492 (refer to
registered. Power to the smoke detector is maintained Section 18.1 System Options 1 on page 80), this output
to facilitate unit identification through the detector
memory.
does not operate and arms the system in STAY
Mode 1 only.
Connect this output to the negative side of any
fire/smoke detector. To configure an output for this
feature, use these settings.
2,15
Communications Failure after Three
Unsuccessful Calls
This output operates after the communication dialer
makes three unsuccessful calls to the base station
receiver. The output is reset when all messages are
transmitted (that is, when the buffer is empty or when
all possible attempts are made).
EVENT TYPE – 2,7
POLARITY – 10
TIMEBASE – 2
MULTIPLIER – 15
The zone to which the fire or smoke detector is
connected should be programmed as:
3,0
Communications Failure
This output operates after the communication dialer
makes all possible attempts to reach the base station
receiver. The output is reset when the first Kiss-Off is
received. This output does not operate for domestic
formats.
ZONE TYPE – 13
ZONE PULSE COUNT – 3
ZONE PULSE COUNT TIME – 15
2,8
2,9
2,10
Remote Control 1
Remote Control 2
Remote Control 3
3,1
Dialer Disabled
This output operates when the Dialer reporting
functions allowed option (1) in Location 177 is not
selected (refer to Section 12.1 Dialer Options 1 on page
52). The output is reset when Option 1 is selected.
These outputs can be remotely activated (turned on
or off) by the following methods:
•
Remote codepad (refer to Section 5.2.7 Turning
Outputs On/Off for more information).
3,2
Dialer Active
This output operates when the communication dialer
is online. The output is reset when the
communication dialer releases the telephone line.
•
Remotely through the Alarm Link Software
(refer to your Alarm Link Instruction Manual for
further information).
3,3
Ring Detect
2,11
Radio Control Output 1
This output operates when an incoming call is
detected by the control panel. The output is reset
when the ringing stops or when the call is answered.
This output operates when the [DOOR] button on
the 4-channel hand-held transmitter is activated when
the system is armed or disarmed.
3,4
Codepad Panic (Multi-Break)
2,12
Radio Control Output 2
This output operates when a Panic Alarm is initiated
from the codepad. The output operates for 200 ms if
the polarity is programmed as 1. You can program
the time base and multiplier to increase the period
during which the output operates.
This output operates when the [AUX] button on the
4-channel hand-held transmitter is activated when the
system is armed or disarmed.
If you select Option 8 in Location 492 (refer to
Section 18.1 System Options 1 on page 80), this output
does not operate and arms the system in STAY
Mode 1 only.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 16.0
Programmable Outputs
EN | 75
3,5
3,6
3,7
3,8
Mimic Zone 1
Mimic Zone 2
Mimic Zone 3
Mimic Zone 4
Mimic Zone 5
Mimic Zone 6
Mimic Zone 7
Mimic Zone 8
Example
Zone 1 is allocated to Area 1. If Zone 1 registers an
alarm, Output Event Type 5,2 operates. The output
is reset when a valid User Code assigned to Area 1 is
entered.
3,9
3,10
3,11
3,12
5,6
5,7
Area 1 Is Armed
Area 2 Is Armed
These two outputs operate when their corresponding
area are armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1.
The output is reset when the corresponding area is
disarmed.
These output types mimic the zone inputs. The
output operates when the zone is unsealed and is
reset when the zone is sealed. They operate
regardless of the selected zone type (for example, a
zone programmed as Not Used can still operate a
mimic output). This feature operates when the system
is armed or disarmed.
Example
If Area 1 is armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode
1, Output Event Type 5,6 operates. The output is
reset when Area 1 is disarmed.
4,5
Global Chime
This output operates when any Chime zones are
activated. The output is reset when the zone is
resealed. Refer to Section 14.3.2 Zone Types on page 61
for more information.
5,10
5,11
Area 1 Is Disarmed
Area 2 Is Disarmed
These two outputs operate when their corresponding
area is disarmed. The output is reset when the
corresponding area is armed.
4,6
Zone Not Sealed
This output operates when a Burglary Zone is
unsealed. Chime zones do not operate this output.
Example
If Area 1 is disarmed, Output Event Type 5,10
operates. The output is reset when Area 1 is
disarmed.
4,7
Zone Not Sealed after Exit Time
This output operates at the end of Exit Time if a
Burglary Zone is unsealed. The output is reset when
all zones are sealed or the system is disarmed. Chime
zones do not operate this output.
5,14
Any Areas Armed
This output operates when either Area 1 or Area 2 is
armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1. The
output is reset when both areas are disarmed.
4,9
AC MAINS 60 Hz or 50 Hz
This output is activated when the AC MAINS supply
frequency is 60 Hz. The output is reset if the AC
MAINS supply returns to 50 Hz.
5,15
Any Areas Disarmed
This output operates when either Area 1 or Area 2 is
disarmed. The output is reset when both areas are
armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1.
Output Event Types 4,10 through 6,1 are
available only to partitioned ICP-CC488
Control Panels.
6,0
Area 1 Codepad Data Terminal
This output type is used to connect the data terminal
of the Area 1 codepad when you are using the
Master Partitioned codepad as the main codepad.
4,10
4,11
Area 1 Has Unsealed Zone
Area 2 Has Unsealed Zone
Set DIP switch 1 to the ON position for the Area 1
codepad to operate correctly.
These two outputs operate when a zone in their
corresponding area registers as unsealed either when
the area is armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode,
or the area is disarmed.
Refer to Figure 16 on page 76 for the location of the
DIP switches on the pack of the codepad.
If you are not using a Master Partitioned as the main
codepad, connect the data cable from the Area 1
codepad to the DATA terminal on the control panel
and select Option 2 in Location 500 (refer to Section
19.3.1 Partitioning Options 1 on page 85).
Example
Zone 1 is allocated to Area 1. If Zone 1 is unsealed,
Output Event Type 4,10 operates. The output is reset
when the zone is resealed.
5,2
5,3
Area 1 in Alarm
Area 2 in Alarm
Refer to Figure 16 on page 76 for more information
on connecting codepads when the system is
partitioned.
These two outputs operate when a zone in their
corresponding area registers an alarm. These outputs
are reset when a valid User Code is entered.
6,1
Area 2 Codepad Data Terminal
This output type is used to connect the data terminal
of the Area 2 codepad.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 16.0
Programmable Outputs
EN | 76
Set DIP Switch 2 to the ON position for the Area 2
codepad to operate correctly.
2 – Normally Open, Pulsing Low
This polarity is normally open circuit and switches to
pulsing 0 V when the event occurs. The output
switches back to open circuit when the event is
restored. Time parameters vary the On time of the
pulse.
Refer to Figure 16 on page 76 for the location of the
DIP switches on the back of the codepad.
Figure 16: DIP Switch Location on Codepad
3 – Normally Open, One-Shot Low
1
This one-shot polarity is normally open circuit and
switches to 0 V when the event occurs. The output
switches back to open circuit when the time
parameter setting expires. This one-shot time setting
always runs its full duration and cannot be manually
reset.
4 – Normally Open, One-Shot Low with Reactivate
This one-shot polarity is normally open circuit and
switches to 0 V when the event occurs. Every time
the event occurs, it restarts the one-shot timer. The
output switches back to open circuit when the one-
shot time expires. This one-shot time setting always
runs its full duration. You cannot reset the time.
1 – DIP switches
5 – Normally Open, One-Shot Low with Reset
16.3 Output Polarity
There are fifteen different polarities. Each polarity is
designated by a number that you program into the
appropriate location for the output.
This one-shot polarity is normally open circuit and
switches to 0 V when the event occurs. Because the
output switches back to open circuit when the one-
shot time expires or when the event returns to
normal, the operation of the output can be shortened
regardless of the programmed time parameter.
Table 56: Event Type Polarities
6 – Normally Open, One-Shot Low with Alarm
Option
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Output not used
Normally open, going low
Normally open, pulsing low
Normally open, one-shot low
Normally open, one-shot low (reactivate)
Normally open, one-shot low (can reset)
Normally open, one-shot low (alarm)
Normally open, latching low
Normally low, going open
This one-shot polarity is normally open circuit and
switches to 0 V when the event occurs. The output
switches back to open circuit when the one-shot time
expires, the event returns to normal, or the system is
disarmed.
This polarity is ideally suited for the operation of
strobe lights because you can program the lights to
reset (up to 99 hours) and prevent them from burning
out or bothering others due to prolonged operation.
7
8
9
7 – Normally Open, Latching Low
Normally low, pulsing open
This polarity is normally open circuit and switches to
0 V when the event occurs. The output switches back
to open circuit when a user holds down [7] on the
remote codepad until two beeps sound. Time
parameters do not apply to this polarity.
10
11
12
13
14
Normally low, one-shot open
Normally low, one-shot open (reactivate)
Normally low, one-shot open (can reset)
Normally low, one-shot open (alarm)
Normally low, latching open
8 – Normally Low, Going Open
0 – Output Not Used
This polarity is normally 0 V and switches to open
circuit when the event occurs. The output switches
back to 0 V when the event is restored. Time
parameters do not apply to this polarity.
If an output is not required, program the polarity as
0.
1 – Normally Open, Going Low
This polarity is normally open circuit and switches to
0 V when the event occurs. The output switches back
to open circuit when the event is restored. Time
parameters do not apply to this polarity.
9 – Normally Low, Pulsing Open
This polarity is normally 0 V and switches to pulsing
open circuit when the event occurs. The output
switches back to 0 V when the event is restored.
Time parameters vary the Off time of the pulse.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 17.0
System Event Timers
EN | 77
You can only set the time base settings to one of the
10 – Normally Low, One-Shot Open
values listed in Table 57 on page 77. The multiplier
value is a two-digit decimal number from 00 to 99.
For greater accuracy, use 60 sec for 1-min intervals
and 60 min for 1-hour intervals.
This one-shot polarity is normally 0 V and switches
to open circuit when the event occurs. The output
switches back to 0 V when the time parameter
expires. This one-shot time setting always runs its full
duration and cannot be manually reset.
16.5 Pulsing Polarities
11 – Normally Low, One-Shot Open with
Reactivate
When programming pulsing polarities, you must set
both the On and Off times. The duration, or On
time, for an output is determined by time base
selected from one of the options in Table 57 on page
77. In other words, there are only four possible On
times.
This one-shot polarity is normally 0 V and switches
to open circuit when the event occurs. Every time the
event occurs, it restarts the one-shot timer. The
output switches back to 0 V when the one-shot time
expires.
The Off time is calculated by multiplying the On
time by a decimal number between 00 and 99. If you
want an output to operate for 200 ms every 5 sec,
program the time settings as:
12 – Normally Low, One-Shot Open with Reset
This one-shot polarity is normally 0 V and switches
to open circuit when the event occurs. Because the
output switches back to 0 V when the one-shot time
expires or when the event returns to normal, the one-
shot timer can be shortened regardless of the time
setting.
On Time: 1
Off Time: 2 5
Table 58: Pulsing Time Settings
13 – Normally Low, One-Shot Open with Alarm
On Time
200 ms
Off Time
200 ms to
19.8 sec
1 to 99 sec
1 to 99 min
1 to 99 hr
Increments
200 ms
Tolerance
200 ms
This one-shot polarity is normally 0 V and switches
to open circuit when the event occurs. Because the
output switches back to 0 V when the one-shot time
expires, the event returns to normal, or the system is
disarmed, the one-shot timer can be shortened
regardless of the time setting.
1 sec
1 min
1 hour
1 sec
1 min
1 hr
1 sec
1 min
hr
16.6 One-Shot Polarities
14 – Normally Low, Latching Open
The duration, or On time, of an output is determined
by the product of the time base and the multiplier.
This polarity is normally 0 V and switches to open
circuit when the event occurs. The output switches
back to 0 V when the user holds down [7] on the
remote codepad until two beeps sound. Time
parameters do not apply to this polarity.
If you want an output to operate for 5 sec, program
the time settings as:
Time Base: 2
Multiplier: 0 5
16.4 Output Timing
The timing of outputs is calculated by the time base
and a multiplier. These two values play different
roles depending on the selected polarity. When you
program outputs to pulse, you can set both the On
and Off times. You can program one-shot polarities
to operate from 200 ms to 99 hours.
The On time is calculated by multiplying the time
base setting (1 sec) by the multiplier value (05) (for
example, 1 x 05 – 5 sec).
Table 59: One-Shot Time Settings
On Time
Increments
200 ms
1 sec
1 min
1 hr
Tolerance
200 ms
1 sec
1 min
hour
The maximum value you can program in
the two multiplier locations is 9,9.
200 ms to 19.8 sec
1 to 99 sec
1 to 99 min
1 to 99 hr
Table 57: Time Base Settings
17.0 System Event Timers
This section covers the features that involve timing,
such as Entry and Exit Times, Sensor Watch Time,
Siren Run Time, and System Date and Time.
Option
Description
200 ms
1 sec
1 min
1 hour
1
2
3
4
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 17.0
System Event Timers
EN | 78
17.1 Programming Entry/Exit Timers
17.5 Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode
472 to 473
Location
There are two programming locations for Entry
Timer 1, Entry Timer 2, Exit Time for AWAY
Mode, and Entry Guard Time for STAY Mode.
Location
472
Default
Increments of 1 sec
(0 sec to 15 sec)
Increments of 16 sec
(0 sec to 240 sec)
0
The first location of the timer allows you to set the
timer in increments of 1 sec. The sec location allows
you to set the timer in increments of 16 sec. Add
these two locations together for the total time.
473
0
Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode is the delay time
used for all zones except 24-Hour Burglary and 24-
Hour Fire Zones when the system is armed in STAY
Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2. All zones, including Delay
Zones, use this timer for the entry delay (for
example, the Entry Guard Timer overrides the delay
time programmed for a Delay Zone). If the Entry
Guard Timer is programmed as 0, each zone acts
according to its programmed zone type.
Example
To set the Entry Time to 18 sec, program Location
466 as 2 (2 x 1 sec = 2 sec) and Location 467 as 1 (1
x 16 sec = 16 sec) for a total time of 18 sec (2 + 16 =
18).
17.2 Entry Timer 1
466 to 467
Location
Refer to Section 14.3.7 to program zones to be
automatically isolated in STAY Mode 1. Refer to
Section 5.2.6 to program zones to be automatically
isolated in STAY Mode 2.
Location
466
Default
Increments of 1 sec
(0 sec to 15 sec)
Increments of 16 sec
(0 sec to 240 sec)
4
467
1
17.6 Delay Alarm Reporting Time
You can program Entry Timer 1 from 0 to 255 sec in
increments of 1 sec. Entry Timer 1 is the delay time
used by the Delay-1 Zones. Refer to Section 14.3.2
Zone Types on page 61 for more information.
474 to 475
Location
Location
Default
Increments of 1 sec (0 sec to
15 sec)
474
0
Increments of 16 sec (0 sec to
240 sec)
475
0
17.3 Entry Timer 2
468 to 467
Location
These locations program the time in sec that a
delayed report waits dormant in the dial buffer
before it is sent to the receiving party. If a User Code
holder resets the alarm within this time frame, the
control panel clears the dialer buffer and does not
report the alarm to the receiving party. Refer to
Section 14.3.5 Zone Options 1 on page 61 to program
zones for delay alarm reporting.
Location
468
Default
Increments of 1 sec
(0 sec to 15 sec)
Increments of 16 sec
(0 sec to 240 sec)
8
467
2
You can program Entry Timer 2 from 0 to 255 sec in
increments of 1 sec. Entry Timer 2 is the delay time
used by Delay-2 Zones. Refer to Section 14.3.2 Zone
Types on page 61 for more information.
17.7 Sensor Watch Time
476 to 477
Location
Location
476
477
Default
17.4 Exit Timer
Increments of days (tens digit)
Increments of days (units digit)
0
0
470 to 471
Location
Location
Default
The time set in these two locations determines the
number of days (0 to 99) a zone can remain sealed
before registering as a fault. This feature is active
only when the system is disarmed. If a zone
programmed for Sensor Watch is not unsealed and
reset during this time, the FAULT indicator lights.
Refer to Section 3.13 Fault Descriptions on page 18 for
more information on Sensor Watch Faults. Refer to
Section 14.3.5 Zone Options 1 on page 61 for
Increments of 1 sec
(0 sec to 15 sec)
Increments of 16 sec
(0 sec to 240 sec)
470
12
471
3
You can program the Exit Timer from 0 to 255 sec in
increments of 1 sec. When arming the system in
AWAY Mode, the remote codepad beeps during
Exit Time until the final 10 sec, when the codepad
sounds one continuous beep to indicate the end of
Exit Time is near.
programming zones for Sensor Watch.
The remote codepad always sounds one short beep
at the end of Exit Time when arming in STAY Mode
1 or STAY Mode 2.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 17.0
System Event Timers
EN | 79
The Sensor Watch Time counter is active only when
the control panel is disarmed. If the system is
disarmed for 8 hours a day and the Sensor Watch
Time is programmed for 1 day, a zone programmed
for Sensor Watch registers a Sensor Watch Fault if it
is not activated while disarmed within 3 days.
This location sets the time period during which the
control panel warns you it is automatically armed in
AWAY Mode. The codepad beeps once every
second until the Pre-Alert Timer expires: the system
then automatically arms itself in AWAY Mode. If
you want the system to automatically arm in STAY
Mode 1, enable Option 4 in Location 496 (refer to
Section 18.5 Consumer Options 1 on page 82).
This feature is useful, for example, when someone
places objects in the view of a motion detector, which
prevents the detector from picking up movement.
After the control panel is automatically armed in
AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1, Exit Time starts. If
a valid User Code is entered during the Pre-Alert
Time, the Auto Arming Time programmed in
Locations 482 to 485 (refer to Section 17.12 Auto
Arming Time on page 79) is extended by 1 hour.
To disable Sensor Watch Reports, program Locations
389 and 390 as 0 (refer to Section 15.5 Zone Status –
Sensor Watch Reports on page 66).
17.8 Codepad Lockout Time
478
Location
If you want a programmable output to operate
during the Auto Arming Pre-Alert Time, use Output
Event Type 0,5 Auto Arm Pre-Arming Alert Time
(refer to page 71).
0
No lockout
Lockout time (increments of 10 sec)
1 to 15
All codepads are locked out for the programmed
time if an invalid code is entered more times than
allowed by the code retry attempts programmed in
Location 424 (refer to Section 15.26 System Status –
Access Denied on page 69). If the Codepad Lockout
Time is programmed as 0, codepad lockout does not
occur.
17.12 Auto Arming Time
482 to 485
Location
Location
482
483
484
485
Default
Hour of the day (tens digit)
Hour of the day (units digit)
Minute of the day (tens digit)
Minute of the day (units digit)
0
0
0
0
17.9 Siren Run Time
479
Location
Default
0
These locations specify the time of day the system
automatically arms itself in AWAY Mode. Set this
time in 24-hour format (for example, program 10:30
PM as 2230). If you want the system to arm in STAY
Mode 1, select Option 4 in Location 496 (refer to
Section 18.5 Consumer Options 1on page 82).
5
No siren time
1 to 15 Siren time in min
The Siren Run Time determines how long the horn
speaker operates during an alarm. You can program
the Siren Run Time from 0 to 15 min in 1-min
intervals.
If forced arming is disabled for any zone, the
automatic arming feature operates regardless of
whether any zones are unsealed. Refer to Section
14.3.7 Zone Options 2 on page 63 for more
information on programming zones for forced
arming.
17.10 Siren Sound Rate
480
Location
7
Default
0
15
Slowest frequency
Fastest frequency
User Code 16 is reported when this feature is used.
For partitioned ICP-CC488 Control Panels, both
areas are automatically armed in AWAY Mode at the
same time each day.
The Siren Sound Rate varies the frequency of the
siren tone slowest (0) and to fastest (15). The Siren
Sound Rate does not change the frequency of the fire
alarm tone.
17.13 Auto Disarming Time
486 to 489
17.11 Auto Arming Pre-Alert Timer
Location
Location
486
Default
481
Location
Default
0
Hour of the day (tens digit)
Hour of the day (units digit)
Minute of the day (tens digit)
Minute of the day (units digit)
0
0
0
0
1
487
No alert time
1 to 15 Alert time (increments of 5 min)
488
489
These locations specify the time of day the system
automatically disarms itself. Set this time in 24-hour
format (for example, program 10:30 PM as 2230).
User Code 16 is reported when this feature is used.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 18.0
System and Consumer Options
EN | 80
For partitioned ICP-CC488 Control Panels, both
areas are automatically disarmed at the same time
each day.
2. Enter the day, month, year, hour, and minute in
DD, MM, YY, HH, MM format (where DD is
the day of the month, MM is the month of the
year, YY is the year, HH is the hour of the day,
and MM minute of the day) and press [AWAY].
Use 24:00 hour format when programming the
hour of the day.
17.14 Kiss-Off Wait Time
490
Location
3
Default
Increments of 500 ms (500 ms to 8 sec)
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators are extinguished. If a long beep
sounds, there was an error when you entered the
date and time.
This location sets the time the control panel waits for
acknowledgment before resending a report. This
timer applies only to the 4 + 2 Express Format.
Example
17.15 Speaker Beep Volume
To set the date and time for the 1st January 2004 at
10:30 PM, enter:
491
Location
13
No beeps
Default
0
[2 5 8 0 6][AWAY][0 1 0 1 0 4 2 2 3 0][AWAY]
15
Loudest beeps
This location allows you to adjust the speaker volume
for remote radio operation.
18.0 System and Consumer
Options
The locations in this section have up to four options.
You can select any combination of these options by
programming a single value. Calculate this value by
adding the option bit numbers together. Refer to
Section 7.3 Programming Option Bits on page 36 for
more information.
17.16 System Time
901 to 904
Location
Location
901
902
903
904
Default
Hour of the day (tens digit)
Hour of the day (units digit)
Minute of the day (tens digit)
Minute of the day (units digit)
0
0
0
0
18.1 System Options 1
The ICP-CC488 Control Panel has a real-time 24-
hour clock you must set during installation. Set this
time in 24-hour HHMM format (for example,
program 10:30 PM as 2230). You must reset the
System Time every time the system is powered
down.
492
Location
1
2
4
8
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. smart lockout allowed
Horn speaker monitor
Strobe indications for radio arm/disarm
Assign Button 4 on transmitter to operate STAY
Mode 1
17.17 System Date
1 – Smart Lockout Allowed
905 to 910
Location
This feature allows the control panel to remove any
zones that are programmed for lockout dialer from
the lockout list when the sirens are running. This
feature allows a monitoring station to receive zone
alarm reports from previously locked out zones
during siren time. Refer to Section 14.3.5 Zone Options
1 on page 61 for information on programming zones
for lockout dialer and lockout siren.
Location
905
906
907
908
Default
Day of the month (tens digit)
Day of the month (units digit)
Month of the year (tens digit)
Month of the year (units digit)
Current year (tens digit)
0
1
0
1
0
1
909
910
Current year (units digit)
The ICP-CC488 Control Panel has a real-time
12-month calendar you must set during installation.
Set the date in DDMMYY format (for example,
program 1 January 2004 as 010104). You must reset
the System Date every time the system is powered
down.
Refer to Section 14.5 Swinger Shutdown Count for Dialer
on page 64 to program the number of times the zone
can report before being locked out.
2 – Horn Speaker Monitor
If this option is selected, the control panel detects
when the horn speaker is disconnected from the
speaker terminals. The FAULT indicator lights when
the horn speaker is disconnected and is extinguished
when the horn speaker is reconnected.
To set the date and time:
1. Enter your Master Code and press [6][AWAY].
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY
indicators flash.
If an output is required to operate when the horn
speaker is disconnected, use Output Event Type 1,6
Horn Speaker Monitor Fail (refer to page 72 for
more information).
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 18.0
System and Consumer Options
EN | 81
4 – Strobe Indications for Radio Arm/Disarm
4 – Codepad Medical To Be Silent
This option allows the strobe to indicate when the
system is armed and disarmed when remotely
operating the system using the DSRF Series RF
Receiver.
If this option is selected, a Codepad Medical Alarm
does not operate the horn speaker, the bell, or the
strobe outputs. If this option is not selected, all three
outputs operate after a Codepad Medical Alarm is
activated when a user presses [7] and [9] at the same
time on the remote codepad. Selecting this option
does not affect the operation of the communication
dialer.
Table 60: Strobe Indications for Remote
Operations
If you want to disable the reporting of a Codepad
Medical Alarm, program Locations 409 and 410 as 0
(refer to Section 15.18 Codepad Medical Report on page
68).
Strobe Duration
3 sec
6 sec
System Status
System disarmed
System armed in AWAY Mode
System armed in STAY Mode 1
6 sec
8 – Access Denied (Code Retries) To Be Silent
8 – Assign Button 4 To Operate STAY Mode 4
If this option is selected, a Codepad Tamper Alarm
does not operate the horn speaker, bell, or the strobe
outputs. If this option is not selected, all three outputs
operate after a Codepad Tamper Alarm occurs.
This option allows Button 4 on the RF3334
4 Channel Hand Held Transmitter to arm the system
in STAY Mode 1.
18.2 System Options 2
Refer to Section 15.26 System Status – Access Denied on
page 69 to set the number of invalid code retries that
causes an alarm condition. Selecting this option does
not affect the operation of the communication dialer.
If you want to disable the reporting of Access Denied
reports, program Locations 424 to 426 as 0.
493
Location
0
Default
1
2
4
8
Codepad Panic to be silent
Codepad Fire to be silent
Codepad Medical to be silent
Access denied (code retries) to be silent
18.3 System Options 3
1 – Codepad Panic To Be Silent
494
Location
1
2
4
8
AC fail after 1 hour (disabled – after 2 min)
Ignore AC fail
Pulse count handover allowed
Handover delay to be sequential
If this option is selected, a Codepad Panic Alarm or
Radio Remote Panic Alarm does not operate the
horn speaker, the bell, or the strobe outputs. If this
option is not selected, all three outputs operate after a
Codepad Panic Alarm is activated when a user
presses [1] and [3] or [STAY] and [AWAY] at the
same time on the remote codepad. Selecting this
option does not affect the operation of the
communication dialer.
1 – AC Fail after 1 Hour
If this option is selected, the MAINS indicator flashes
when the AC MAINS supply is disconnected. An AC
Loss signal (Contact ID Event Code 301) is
transmitted to the base station receiver after the AC
MAINS supply is disconnected continuously for
longer than 60 min.
If you want to disable reporting of a Codepad Panic
Alarm, program Locations 404 and 405 as 0 (refer to
Section 15.16 Codepad Panic Report on page 66).
If this option is not selected, the MAINS indicator
flashes and an AC Loss signal (Contact ID Event
Code 301) is transmitted to the base station receiver
after the AC MAINS power is disconnected
continuously for 2 min.
2 – Codepad Fire To Be Silent
If this option is selected, a Codepad Fire Alarm does
not operate the horn speaker, the bell, or the strobe
outputs. If this option is not selected, all three outputs
operate after a Codepad Fire Alarm is activated
when a user presses [4] and [6] at the same time on
the remote codepad. Selecting this option does not
affect the operation of the communication dialer.
The MAINS indicator stops flashing when the AC
MAINS supply is restored longer than 2 min.
An AC Loss Restore Report is transmitted to the
base station receiver after the AC MAINS supply is
restored continuously for more than 2 min regardless
of whether this option is selected.
If you want to disable the reporting of a Codepad
Fire Alarm, program Locations 407 and 408 as 0
(refer to Section 15.17 Codepad Fire Report on page 66).
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 18.0
System and Consumer Options
EN | 82
2 – Ignore AC Fail
Example
If this option is selected, the MAINS indicator does
not flash and the codepad does not beep every
minute when the AC MAINS is disconnected from
the control panel. If you want a programmable
output to operate when the AC MAINS fails, use
Output Event Type 1,4 AC Fail (refer to page 72).
If the system is disarmed when the system is powered
down, the system returns to the disarmed state when
the system is powered back up.
4 – Internal Crystal To Keep Time
If this option is selected, the control panel uses the
internal crystal (XTAL) to keep track of time. This
option is useful in countries that do not have a
constant MAINS frequency. If this option is not
selected, the control panel uses the MAINS
frequency as a time base to keep time.
If this option is selected, an AC Loss report (Contact
ID Event Code 301) still reports to the base station
receiver unless Locations 416 and 417 are
programmed as 0 (refer to Section 15.22 System Status
– AC Fail Report on page 68).
8 – Night Arm Station, or RE005 Installed
4 – Zone Pulse Count Handover
Select this option to use the RE005 2-Channel Radio
Interface or the CP105 Night Arm Station. This
option enables any of these three accessories to
operate the control panel. User Code 16 is used to
send Open/Close Reports when you use any of these
accessories.
If this option is selected, any zone pulse count
readings are handed over and accumulate to any
zone that is activated during the same arming cycle.
Zone pulse count handover only operates with zone
pulse count options 8 to 15. Refer to Section 14.3.3
Zone Pulse Count on page 61 and Section 14.3.4 Zone
Pulse Count Time on page 61 for more information.
The Night Arm Station cannot operate a
partitioned ICP-CC488 Control Panel.
24-Hour Zones can receive any handover
pulses from other zones. 24-Hour Zones
cannot hand over pulses to other zones.
18.5 Consumer Options 1
496
Location
8 – Handover Delay To Be Sequential
0
Default
If this option is selected, handover delay is sequential
(that is, in numerical order from lowest to highest). If
the sequence is broken before the Entry Time
expires, an alarm occurs. If this option is not selected,
handover delay follows the entry path if a Delay
Zone is activated first. Refer to Section 14.3.2 Zone
Types on page 61 for more information about
Handover Zones.
1
2
4
8
Test reports only when armed
Test report after siren reset
Auto arm in STAY Mode 1
STAY indicator to display Day Alarm status
1 – Test Reports Only When Armed
If this option is selected, Test Reports (Contact ID
Event Code 602) are only sent when the system is
armed. It is no longer necessary to send a Test
Report with an Opening and Closing Report every
day.
18.4 System Options 4
495
Location
0
Default
Most commercial premises are open during the
working week, so a Test Report is not necessary
because Open and Close Reports are sent at the
programmed time. If you want to manually send a
Test Report, press and hold [9] button until two
beeps sound.
1
2
4
8
Panel to power up disarmed (if power reset)
Arm/disarm tracking on power up
Internal crystal to keep time
Night arm station or RE005 installed
1 – Panel To Power Up Disarmed
Refer to Section 15.28 Test Reporting Time to set the
desired Test Report time. To set the first Test Report,
refer to Section 5.1.2 Set the Number of Days until the
First Test Report.
If this option is selected, the control panel powers up
in the disarmed state when the battery and AC
MAINS are reconnected after the system is powered
down.
2 – Test Report after Siren Reset
If this option is not selected, the system is always
powered up armed in AWAY Mode.
Select this option to force the control panel to send a
Test Report after the siren is reset. This can be used
to indicate to the monitoring station that the control
panel itself was not tampered with during the alarm
period.
2 – Arm/Disarm Tracking on Power Up
If selected, the control panel keeps its current armed
status in non-volatile memory. If the control panel is
restarted due to a power failure, the control panel
returns to being armed or disarmed as it was before
the power failed.
4 – Auto Arm in STAY Mode 1
Select this option if automatic arming in STAY Mode
1 is preferred to automatic arming in AWAY Mode.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 18.0
System and Consumer Options
EN | 83
Program the time that the control panel automatically
arms itself in Locations 482 to 485 (refer to Section
17.12 Auto Arming Time on page 79). Set the Auto
Arming Pre-Alert Time in Location 481 (refer to
Section 17.11).
18.7 Consumer Options 3
498
Location
1
2
Codepad fault beeps allowed
Use digit 3 for Codepad Duress Alarm (instead of
digit 9)
4
Alarms activate sirens and strobe outputs in STAY
Mode 1 and 2
Zone Tamper Alarms to be silent
For partitioned ICP-CC488 Control
Panels, both areas are automatically
armed.
8
1 – Codepad Fault Alarms Beep
8 – STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm Status
If this option is selected, the FAULT indicator flashes
and the codepad beeps once every minute until the
user acknowledges a system fault. To acknowledge a
new fault and stop the codepad from beeping once
every minute, press [AWAY].
If this option is selected, the STAY indicator flashes
once every 3 sec when Day Alarm is enabled.
Specify Day Alarm zones in Location 265 (refer to
Section 14.1 Day Alarm Information on page 56).
You can turn Day Alarm on and off by holding
down [4] for 2 sec. Three beeps indicate Day Alarm
is turned on and two beeps indicate Day Alarm is
turned off. Refer to Section 14.1.3 Day Alarm Operation
on page 56 or more information.
If this option is not selected, the codepad only the
FAULT indicator flashes when a new fault occurs
and the codepad does not beep once every minute.
2 – Digit 3 for Codepad Duress Instead of 9
If this option is selected, a user can add 3 (instead of
a 9) to the code used to disarm the system to activate
a Duress Alarm.
18.6 Consumer Options 2
497
Location
1
2
Codepad display extinguishes after 60 sec
Single button arming allowed (AWAY/STAY Modes
1 and 2)
Single button disarming allowed (STAY Modes 1
and 2)
Alarm memory reset on disarm
4 – Alarms Activate Sirens and Strobe Outputs in
STAY Modes 1 and 2
Select this option if audible alarms are required when
the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY
Mode 2.
4
8
8 – Zone Tamper Alarms To Be Silent
1 – Codepad Display Extinguish after 60 Sec
This option allows Tamper Alarms, when Option 15
is programmed in Location 266 (refer to Section 14.2
EOL Resistor Value on page 56), or Tamper Alarms on
RF wireless devices to be silent when activated.
If this option is selected, all indicators on the remote
codepad display are extinguished if a button is not
pressed for 60 sec. The indicators lights again when
there is an alarm (except a silent alarm), when a
button is pressed on the codepad, when the AC
MAINS fail beeps, or if the Entry Timer is activated.
18.8 Radio Input Options
499
Location
2 – Single Button Arming Allowed
0
Default
1
2
3
4
DSRF Receiver
If this option is selected, the hold-down functions for
arming in AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 and STAY
Mode 2 are functional. Refer to Section 5.4 Hold-Down
Functions on page 32 for more information.
Latching keyswitch input
Momentary keyswitch input
Reserved
1 – DSRF Series Receiver
4 – Single Button Disarming Allowed
Select this option to use the DSRF Series Receiver
for remote operations using radio remote hand-held
transmitters.
This option operates only when Option 2 in this
location is also selected. This option allows hold-
down functions for disarming from STAY Mode 1
and STAY Mode 2. Refer to Section 5.4 Hold-Down
Functions on page 32 for more information.
2 – Latching Keyswitch Input
Selecting this option allows you to connect a latching
keyswitch to the TS2 terminals D and GND to
remotely arm and disarm the system in AWAY
Mode.
8 – Alarm Memory Reset on Disarm
If this option is selected, the alarm events memory
clears from the remote codepad when the system is
disarmed. If this option is not selected, the system
must be armed and disarmed again to clear alarm
memory from the remote codepad.
4 – Momentary Keyswitch Input
Selecting this option allows you to connect a
momentary keyswitch to the TS2 terminals D and
GND to remotely arm and disarm the system in
AWAY Mode.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 19.0
Partitioning
EN | 84
19.2 Using Codepads in a Partitioned
System
19.0 Partitioning
The ICP-CC488 Control Panel includes the
19.2.1
Operating with a CP5 Area Addressable
LED Codepad
partitioning feature, which can effectively transform
your single control panel into two separate areas.
Normally, arming and disarming the system turns the
entire system on or off. When the ICP-CC488
Control Panel is partitioned, you can arm or disarm
an individual area without affecting the other area.
The display and operations of a CP5 Area
Addressable (CP500A) codepad in a partitioned
system are exactly the same as the CP5 Eight Zone
LED codepad, except that the commands issued
from the codepad affect only the area to which the
codepad is allocated. Refer to Section 3.0 System
Operations on page 14 for more information.
Partitioning is extremely useful when you want to
secure sheds, dual occupancy dwellings, accessory
dwellings, shops, and offices.
Example
Only the CP5 Area Addressable (CP500A) codepad
and the CP5 Master Partitioned (CP500P) codepad
can be used in partitioned systems.
If the codepad is allocated to Area 2, only User
Codes that are allocated to Area 2 can operate the
codepad. If User Codes have access only to Area 1,
entering the code at the Area 2 codepad does not
work.
19.1 CP500 Master Partitioned LED
Codepad
Figure 17: ICP-CP500PW Master Partitioned
Codepad
If you want to determine the area to which the
codepad you are operating is allocated, hold down
[8]. If Zone 1 lights, the codepad is allocated to Area
1. If Zone 2 lights, the codepad is allocated to Area 2.
Refer to Section 5.4 Hold-Down Functions on page 32
for more information.
19.2.2
Operating with a CP5 Master
Partitioned Codepad
Operations using a CP5 Master Partitioned (CP500P)
codepad in a partitioned system are the same as the
CP5 Area Addressable codepad with one exception.
All operations are related only to the lit Area
Display. If the Area Display 2 is lit, the codepad
displays information only for Area 2 (that is, all
operations effect only Area 2). Refer to Section 3.0
System Operations on page 14 for more information.
This codepad is only used on a partitioned ICP-
CC488 Control Panel. The Master Partitioned LED
codepad allows a user to operate both areas
individually from the same codepad, without the
need to operate individual areas from separate
codepads.
To move from one area to the next:
1. Press [AWAY].
The next Area Display indicator lights (for
example, if Area Display 1 is lit, pressing
[AWAY] lights Area Display 2.
2. Press [AWAY] to toggle the display back to other
Area Display indicator.
The codepad is the communications interface
between you and the alarm system. The codepad
allows you to issue commands and offers visual and
audible indications to guide you through general
operation.
In the example, pressing [AWAY] again lights
Area Display 1.
The codepad incorporates a number of indicators:
eight zone indicators show the condition of each
zone, eight area indicators show the area status, and
four other indicators show general status. These
indicators are described in detail in Section ICP-
CP500PW Master Partitioned LED Codepad on page 12.
19.3 Programming
Locations 500 and 501 apply only to a partitioned
ICP-CC488 Control Panel.
These locations have up to four options. You can
select any combination of these options by
programming a single value. Calculate this value by
adding the option bit numbers together. Refer to
Section 7.3 Programming Option Bits on page 36 for
more information.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 19.0
Partitioning
EN | 85
19.3.1
Partitioning Options 1
500
0
8 – Master Codepad To Display AUX Indicator
When Online
Location
Default
If this option is selected, the AUX indicator on the
CP5 Master Partitioned (CP500P) codepad lights
when the control panel seizes the telephone line to
send a report. The AUX indicator is extinguished
when the telephone line is released.
1
2
4
8
First to open/last to close reporting
Area 1 codepad connected to data terminal
Reset sirens from any area allowed
Master codepad to display AUX indicator when
online
19.3.2
Partitioning Options 2
1 – First To Open/Last To Close Reporting
501
0
Location
Default
1
2
Select this option if only one Open/Close Report is
required for a partitioned system. Instead of sending
individual Open/Close reports for each area, a
Closing Report is sent only after both areas are
armed and an Opening Report is sent as soon as one
area is disarmed.
Lock Area 1 to Receiver 1 and Area 2 to Receiver 2
User Code allowed to arm/disarm both areas at the
same time
Reserved
Reserved
4
8
The reports are sent with the Subscriber ID Number
allocated to the specific area. You must program
Subscriber ID Numbers and Open/Close Reports for
both areas.
1 – Lock Area 1 to Receiver 1 and Area 2 to
Receiver 2
If this option is selected, all reports for Area 1 are
sent to Receiver 1 and all reports for Area 2 are sent
to Receiver 2.
This option is applicable only when all
User Codes have a priority level set with
no open/close reports. If User Codes
have priority levels set to Open/Close
Reports, an Opening or Closing report is
always sent when any area is disarmed or
armed, regardless of whether the area
was first to open or last to close.
If this option is not selected, you must manually
program all reporting to be sent to Receiver 1 or
Receiver 2 for both areas.
2 – User Code Allowed To Arm/Disarm Both Areas
at the Same Time
If this option is selected, any user allocated to both
areas can arm or disarm both areas at the same time
without entering the code at each area codepad.
Refer to Sections 5.2.1 and 5.3.1 for more information.
2 – Area 1 Codepad Connected to Data Terminal
If this option is selected, the DATA terminal on the
ICP-CC488 Control Panel is configured to send only
status information that is relevant to Area 1. This
allows you to connect an area addressable codepad
(CP500A) set for Area 1 operation to the DATA
terminal of the control panel instead of connecting
the addressable codepad to an output.
If the user arms both areas at the same time and
Option 1 is selected in Location 500 (refer to Section
19.3.1 Partitioning Options 1 on page 85), only a
Closing Report for Area 2 is sent.
If the user disarms both areas at the same time and
Option 1 is selected in Location 500, only an
Opening Report for Area 1 is sent.
If this option is not selected, the CP5 Master
Partitioned (CP500P) codepad must be used because
the DATA terminal on the control panel displays
information for both Area 1 and Area 2.
19.4 Zone Allocations
You can allocate up to eight zones to each zone. The
eight locations for each area are represented by the
zone indicators on the remote area addressable
codepad. You can map any zone to either area to
appear as any zone on the remote area addressable
codepad (that is, you can allocate a zone to both
Area 1 and Area 2 to become a common zone, but
each Area zone number cannot exceed 8).
An advantage to using this option is that you can
configure a system into separate areas and preserve
the maximum number of programmable outputs for
other applications.
4 – Reset Sirens from Any Area Allowed
This option applies only to a partitioned control
panel. If this option is selected, any valid User Code
from Area 1 or Area 2 can reset the horn speaker,
strobe, bell, or EDMSAT outputs while in alarm.
This option does not allow a User Code allocated to
one area to disarm another area.
Zones programmed as common zones report to the
base station receiver on group zero (Area 1 – Group
1 and Area 2 – Group 2). Zones allocated to only one
area report on the corresponding group number.
Common zones, other than 24-Hour zone types, do
not activate an alarm until both areas are armed in
either AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 19.0
Partitioning
EN | 86
19.4.1
Zone Allocations for Areas 1 and 2
502 to 517
Figure 19: Area 2 Codepad Display
Location
Location
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
Default
Zone 1 LED – Area 1 Codepad
Zone 2 LED – Area 1 Codepad
Zone 3 LED – Area 1 Codepad
Zone 4 LED – Area 1 Codepad
Zone 5 LED – Area 1 Codepad
Zone 6 LED – Area 1 Codepad
Zone 7 LED – Area 1 Codepad
Zone 8 LED – Area 1 Codepad
Zone 1 LED – Area 2 Codepad
Zone 2 LED – Area 2 Codepad
Zone 3 LED – Area 2 Codepad
Zone 4 LED – Area 2 Codepad
Zone 5 LED – Area 2 Codepad
Zone 6 LED – Area 2 Codepad
Zone 7 LED – Area 2 Codepad
Zone 8 LED – Area 2 Codepad
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Area 2 Zone Allocations
Locations 510 to 517: 1 0 0 0 5 6 7 8
19.5 User Code Allocations
534 to 549
Location
Location
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
Default
0
1
Not mapped for this LED
A zone is mapped to this LED
User Code 1
User Code 2
User Code 3
User Code 4
User Code 5
User Code 6
User Code 7
User Code 8
User Code 9
User Code 10
User Code 11
User Code 12
User Code 13
User Code 14
User Code 15
User Code 16
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
You can enable or disable the zone allocations for
Area 1 and Area 2. For example, if the location 507
is set to “0”, the zone LED of Area 1 is not mapped.
Detailed Example
In the following example, Zones 1, 2, 3, and 4 are
allocated to Area 1 to appear as zones 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Zones 1, 5, 6, 7, 8 are allocated to Area 2 to appear
as zones 1, 5, 6, 7, and 8. Programming the same
zone into more than one area specifies that zone as a
common zone.
Figure 18: Area 1 Codepad Display
Locations 534 to 549 are used to assign each User
Code to one or two area areas of a partitioned ICP-
CC488 Control Panel. Enter a value from 0 to 3 into
each of these locations to assign the User Code
holder to the areas it must operate (refer to Table 61).
You can allocate multiple User Codes to the same
area.
Table 61: User Code Allocations
Area 1 Zone Allocations
Locations 502 to 509: 1 2 3 4 0 0 0 0
Option Description
0
1
2
3
Not allocated to an area
Allocated to Area 1
Allocated to Area 2
Allocated to Area 1 and Area 2
19.6 Setting Up and Programming
Codepads for Partitioning
Only the CP5 Area Addressable (CP500A) and CP5
Master Partitioned (CP500P) codepads can be used
with a partitioned ICP-CC488 Control Panel.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 19.0
Partitioning
EN | 87
19.6.1
Setting Up the Master Partitioned
Codepad as the Main Codepad
Figure 20: DIP Switch Location on Codepad
To use the CP5 Master Partitioned (CP500P)
codepad as the main codepad in a partitioned
system, connect the codepad to the main codepad
terminals (CP-, CP+, CLK, and DATA). Set all DIP
switches on the back of the codepad to the ON
position (refer to Figure 20 on page 87).
1
19.6.2
Setting Up an Area 1 Codepad as the
Main Codepad
If you are not using the CP5 Master Partitioned
codepad as the main codepad of the partitioned
system, connect the Area 1 codepad to the main
codepad terminals (CP-, CP+, CLK, and DATA). Set
DIP switch 1 on the back of the codepad into the ON
position (refer to Figure 20 on page 87) and select
Option 2 in Location 500 (refer to Section 19.3.1
Partitioning Options 1 on page 85).
1 – DIP Switches
19.7 Codepad Connections For
Partitioning - Examples
19.6.3
Setting Up an Area 1 Codepad
If the CP-5 Area Addressable (CP500A) codepad is
assigned to Area 1:
1. Set DIP Switch 1 on the back of the remote
codepad to the ON position (refer to Figure 20 on
page 87).
If you want a separate area codepad only for Area 1
when using the CP5 Master Partitioned codepad as
the main codepad, connect the Area 1 codepad to
the main codepad terminals (CP-, CP+, and CLK)
and connect the DATA terminal to one of the
outputs programmed as 6,0 Area 1 Codepad Data
(refer to page 75). Set DIP switch 1 on the back of the
Area 1 codepad to the ON position (refer to Figure 20
on page 87).
2. For Output 1, program Location 436 to 6 and
Location 437 to 0 (refer to page 75).
If the CP-5 Area Addressable (CP500A) codepad is
assigned to Area 2:
1. Set DIP Switch 2 on the back of the remote
codepad to the ON position. (refer to Figure 20
on page 87).
19.6.4
Setting Up an Area 2 Codepad
If you want a separate area codepad only for Area 2,
connect the Area 2 Codepad to the main codepad
terminals (CP-, CP+, and CLK) and connect the
DATA terminal to one of the outputs programmed as
6,1 Area 2 Codepad Data (refer to page 75). Set DIP
switch 2 on the back of the Area 2 codepad to the
ON position (refer to Figure 20 on page 87).
2. For Output 1, program Location 436 to 6 and
Location 437 to 1 (refer to page 75).
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 20.0
RF Information
EN | 88
Figure 21: Connections for CP-5 Master
Partitioned Codepad and CP-5 Area
Addressable Codepad
Figure 22: Connections for Two CP-5 Area
Addressable Codepads
1 – Data
2 – CLK
3 – +12 V
4 – GND
5 – Area 1 Codepad
6 – Area 2 Codepad
1 – Data
2 – CLK
3 – +12 V
4 – GND
5 – Master Partitioned
Codepad
6 – Addressable Area
Codepad
20.0 RF Information
20.1 RF Option Bit
Set the DIP Switches and program these locations for
the two CP-5 Area Addressable (CP500A) codepads
to function correctly.
599
Location
0
1. Set DIP Switch 1 on the back of the remote
codepad for Area 1 to the ON position (refer to
Figure 20 on page 87).
2. Set DIP Switch 2 on the back of the remote
codepad for Area 2 to the ON position.
3. Select Option 2 in Location 500 (refer to Section
19.3.1 Partitioning Options 1 on page 85).
4. For Output 1, program Location 436 to 6 and
Location 437 to 1 (refer to page 75).
Default
1
2
4
Sound siren on RF receiver fail
Sound siren on RF receiver tamper/jamming
Unseal zone that fails supervision (if supervision
enabled)
Enable RF jamming monitoring
8
1 – Sound Siren on RF Receiver Fail
If this option is selected, the horn speaker, piezo, and
strobe operate when the RF receiver fails to
communicate with the control panel.
2 – Sound Siren on RF Tamper/Jamming
If this option is selected, the horn speaker, piezo, and
strobe operate when the tamper switch on the
receiver becomes open circuit or the receiver picks
up jamming signals from an RF device.
4 – Unseal Zone that Fails Supervision
If a wireless zone device fails to send a signal within
the RF Supervision Time programmed in Location
393 (refer to Section 15.8) the codepad zone indicator
lights as unsealed.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 20.0
RF Information
These locations allow you to allocate RF wireless
EN | 89
8 – Enable RF Jamming Monitor
devices 1 to 8 to any of the 16 zones on the control
panel. You cannot map more than one RF wireless
device to the same zone. Refer to Section 20.4 Default
RF Device Mapping (Devices 9 to 16) to map RF wireless
devices 9 to 16. By default, RF devices 1 to 8 are
mapped separately to each of the eight zones (that is,
Device 1 is mapped to Zone 1, Device 2 to Zone 2,
and so on). Locations 616 to 623 and locations 624 to
631 can be programmed as any value from 00 to 15.
Refer to Section 20.5 Using Hexadecimal Values for RF
Device Mapping on page 89 for mapping information.
If this option is selected, the RF receiver monitors the
background RF levels. If this level reaches a preset
limit, the receiver assumes it is being jammed. This
generates a fault on the codepad and sends an RF
Jamming Report to the monitoring station.
20.2 RF Device Mapping Option
600 to 615
Location
Location
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
Default
Map RF Device 1
Map RF Device 2
Map RF Device 3
Map RF Device 4
Map RF Device 5
Map RF Device 6
Map RF Device 7
Map RF Device 8
Map RF Device 9
Map RF Device 10
Map RF Device 11
Map RF Device 12
Map RF Device 13
Map RF Device 14
Map RF Device 15
Map RF Device 16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
20.4 Default RF Device Mapping
(Devices 9 to 16)
624 to 631
Location
Location
Default
Map RF Device 9 to Zone
(1 to 16)
624
08
Map RF Device 10 to
Zone (1 to 16)
Map RF Device 11 to
Zone (1 to 16)
Map RF Device 12 to
Zone (1 to 16)
Map RF Device 13 to
Zone (1 to 16)
Map RF Device 14 to
Zone (1 to 16)
Map RF Device 15 to
Zone (1 to 16)
Map RF Device 16 to
Zone (1 to 16)
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
1
Mapping Disabled
Mapping Enabled
These locations allow you to enable or disable any of
the sixteen RF devices. For example, if location 607
is set to “0”, RF device 7 is not mapped and is
disabled.
0-15
Mapping RF device to zone 1-16
20.3 Default RF Device Mapping
(Devices 1 to 8)
* The programming for zone numbers 9 through 16 is in
hexadecimal code (00 through 15).
616 to 623
Location
These locations allow you to map RF wireless control
panel. You cannot map more than one RF wireless
device to the same zone. Refer to Section 20.3 to map
RF wireless devices 1 to 8.
Location
616
Default Value*
00
Map RF Device 1 to Zone
(1 to 16)
Map RF Device 2 to Zone
(1 to 16)
Map RF Device 3 to Zone
(1 to 16)
Map RF Device 4 to Zone
(1 to 16)
Map RF Device 5 to Zone
(1 to 16)
Map RF Device 6 to Zone
(1 to 16)
Map RF Device 7 to Zone
(1 to 16)
Map RF Device 8 to Zone
(1 to 16)
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
By default, RF devices 9 through 16 are mapped
separately to each of the eight zones (that is, Device 9
is mapped to Zone 9, Device 10 to Zone 10).
Locations 616 to 623 and locations 624 to 631 can be
programmed as any value from 00 to 15. Refer to
Section 20.5 Using Hexadecimal Values for RF Device
Mapping on page 89 for mapping information.
20.5 Using Hexadecimal Values for RF
Device Mapping
To map an RF device, first select a device number
and enable the device. Refer to Section 20.2 RF Device
Mapping Option on page 89.
0-15
Mapping RF device to zone 1-16
* The programming for zone numbers 1 through 8 is in
hexadecimal code (00 through 15).
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 21.0
Optional Equipment
EN | 90
Then, find the RF device number in Section 20.3 (for
devices 1 through 8) on page 89 or Section 20.4 (for
devices 9 through 16) on page 89. Use the device’s
corresponding location (616 through 631). To map
the selected device to a zone other than the default
zone, refer to Table 62 and use the correct
hexadecimal value.
20.7 RF Device Signal Strength (Devices
9 to 16) (Read Only)
809 to 816
Location
Location
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
Default
RF Device 9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
RF Device 10
RF Device 11
RF Device 12
RF Device 13
RF Device 14
RF Device 15
RF Device 16
Table 62: Hexadecimal Values for Zone Nos.
Zone Number
Hexadecimal Value
1
2
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
These locations allow you to view the received signal
strength for RF wireless Devices 9 to 16. Location
809 displays the signal strength of Device 9, Location
810 displays the signal strength of Device 10, and so
on. The signal strength is measured from 0 (lowest) to
8 (highest).
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
21.0 Optional Equipment
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. manufactures a number
of accessories that can be used in conjunction with
the ICP-CC488 Control Panel. These optional pieces
of equipment enhance certain features to make the
system extremely flexible.
21.1 RE012/RE013 2 Channel/4
Channel Hand Held Transmitters
304 MHz
These hand-held radio transmitters can be used in
conjunction with the RE005 304 MHz RF Receiver
to operate the system remotely. Both hand-held
transmitters can remotely arm and disarm the system
in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 and can activate
remote Panic Alarms. The 4-channel hand-held
transmitter can also operate outputs such as garage
doors, swimming pool pumps, or outside lights.
20.6 RF Device Signal Strength (Devices
1 to 8) (Read Only)
801 to 808
Location
Location
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
Default
RF Device 1
RF Device 2
RF Device 3
RF Device 4
RF Device 5
RF Device 6
RF Device 7
RF Device 8
0-15
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
21.2 RE005 2 Channel Radio Interface
The 2-channel radio interface allows customers to
operate control panels remotely and to control two
on-board relays. The interface can be used as a stand-
alone receiver, independent of an ICP-CC488
Control Panel, used solely for remote control of
external devices connected to the two on-board
relays.
Mapping RF Device to Zone 1-16
These locations allow you to view the received signal
strength for RF wireless Devices 1 to 8. Location 801
displays the signal strength of Device 1, Location 802
displays the signal strength of Device 2, and so on.
The signal strength is measured from 0 (lowest) to 8
(highest).
The interface’s operating frequency is 304 MHz with
the ability to store up to 120 radio remote codes.
Connect the interface to an ICP-CC488 Control
Panel using a three-wire connection in parallel with
the codepad and select Option 8 in Location 495
(refer to Section 18.4 System Options 4 on page 82).
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 21.0
Optional Equipment
EN | 91
21.3 SS914 EDMSAT Satellite Siren
21.9 ICP-CP500PW Master Partitioned
Codepad
The EDMSAT Satellite Siren is a totally self-
contained unit incorporating a high-powered siren
and a weatherproof strobe. A 1.2 Ah sealed lead-acid
battery must be installed. The EDMSAT requires
only two wires, which enable charging of the battery
and activating of the siren and strobe. This is
accomplished by pulse code modulating (PCM) the
charging voltage. Any attempt to tamper with the
wiring or to substitute an alternate power source
across the wiring disrupts the data transmission and
activates the EDMSAT immediately. When the
EDMSAT executes a battery test, the unit sounds for
2 sec if the battery test fails. Use Output Event Type
0,0 EDMSAT - Satellite Siren (refer to page 71) when
programming an output for the satellite siren.
This codepad operates with a partitioned ICP-CC488
Control Panel. This codepad enables you to operate
the entire system from a single codepad by toggling
between the two areas by pressing [AWAY]. With
this codepad, it is not necessary to have separate CP5
Area Addressable (CP500A) codepads for each area.
Refer to Section 19.6 Setting Up and Programming
Codepads for Partitioning and Section 19.7 Codepad
Connections For Partitioning for more information.
21.10 CP105 Night Arm Station
The night arm station incorporates a panic button
and allows the user to arm and disarm the system in
STAY Mode 1 from a bedroom or sitting room.
Enable the night arm station to operate with the
system by selecting Option 8 in Location 495 (refer
to Section 18.4 System Options 4).
21.4 CC891 Programming Key
The programming key copies and stores all
information programmed in your control panel. The
programming key can hold all your common
configuration data such as monitoring station
telephone numbers and zone reporting channels.
21.11 TF008 Plug Pack (TF008)
The TF008 plug pack is used with control panels.
The plug pack includes built-in thermal fuses that
blow during overload or fault conditions to eliminate
a possible fire threat due to excessive heat buildup
inside the casing.
21.5 CC816 Alarm Link Software
This software package is designed to program the
ICP-CC488 Control Panel by either the direct link or
remote connect methods. This software can access all
options and features and maintain history and service
reports. Program options to use this feature in
Location 180. Refer to Section 8.0 Alarm Link Software
on page 40 for more information on using Alarm
Link software.
The plug pack incorporates a three-wire flying lead
that enables a MAINS earth connection between the
equipment and the plug pack. This connection might
be required for lightning protection on equipment
connected to phone lines or for safety reasons such as
earthing of metal enclosures.
21.6 ICP-CP508W Eight Zone LED
Codepad
This codepad operates with the control panels. It
provides indications for up to eight zones. This
codepad cannot be used with the ICP-CC488
Control Panel.
21.7 ICP-CP508LW Eight Zone LCD
Codepad
This codepad operates with the ICP-CC488 control
panels. This codepad has a fixed icon display and
provides indications for up to eight zones. This
codepad cannot be used with the ICP-CC488
Control Panel.
21.8 ICP-CP500AW Eight Zone Area
Addressable Codepad
This codepad operates with a partitioned ICP-CC488
Control Panel. This codepad has a DIP switch on the
back to select the area to which the codepad belongs.
Refer to Section 19.6 Setting Up and Programming
Codepads for Partitioning and Section 19.7 Codepad
Connections For Partitioning for more information.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 22.0
Terminals and Descriptions
EN | 92
22.0 Terminals and Descriptions
22.1 Terminal Descriptions
Table 63: Terminal Descriptions
Terminal
Description
EARTH
Connect this terminal to the green wire on the TF008 Plug Pack that is internally connected to
MAINS earth. Because extensive lightning protection is built into the control panel, this
terminal must be connected correctly to take advantage of this protection.
18 VAC
These two terminals are plug-on type, and are the termination point for the TF008 plug pack.
To ensure correct operation, the voltage of the plug pack must be 18 VAC to 22 VAC at 1.3
A (minimum).
+BATTERY
–BATTERY
The +BATTERY terminal connects to the red positive terminal of the battery and the –
BATTERY terminal connects to the black negative terminal of the battery. The battery should
be a 12 VDC sealed lead-acid rechargeable type with a capacity from 1.2 Ah to 6.5 Ah. The
battery is protected by a 2.5 A PTC.
The charging globe situated above the 2.5 A PTC is always lit until the battery is 100%
charged.
GND
+12V
CLK
This group of terminals provides the connection points for your system codepads. All system
codepads should connect in a parallel configuration back to these terminals. The only factor
restricting the number of codepads that can be connected is the available power and its
distribution. Since each codepad has a maximum power requirement of 60 mA with all
indicators lit, take this into consideration to calculate your available continuous power. The
total continuous external load should not exceed 1 A.
DATA
STR
OUT 1
+COM
These terminals are the output interface terminals. They can be configured to any combination
of the functions available through the system programming options. You can use them for a
variety of functions with considerable flexibility. All outputs have a common +12 VDC terminal
and each output can sink up to 400 mA. By default, Output 1 operates a horn speaker.
This group of terminals is protected by the solid-state IPS system, which provides
considerable tolerance to abuse or incorrect wiring. Each output is open collector and does
not source any current, but it can sink up to 400 mA per output.
COMM
N/O
These relay contacts are fully programmable similar to the strobe and Output 1. By default,
they are an alarm output (Sirens Running – Output Event Type 1,15).
The N/O contact is the connection point for the positive side of a DC siren, such as a piezo
screamer. The negative side of the DC siren connects to the GND terminal. The PCB
provides a link (JP2) to connect the COM terminal to either GND or +12 V. Connect this link
to +12 V as shown in Figure 23 on page 95. The relay is rated at 1 A/30 VDC.
+12V
Z4
Z3
These terminals are provided for Zones 3 and 4. The common terminal is +12V. Connect all
normally-closed contacts in series with the EOL resistor and connect all normally-open
contacts in parallel with the EOL resistor. The function of the zones and their response times
are configured using the system programming options. If split EOL is programmed, 24-Hour
Zones or Keyswitch Zones connected in parallel to Zones 3 and 4 act as Zones 7 and 8.
+12V
GND
These two terminals are provided to power detectors and other equipment. They are fuse-
protected by the 1 A PTC.
Z2
Z1
+12V
These terminals are provided for Zones 1 and 2. The common terminal is +12V. Connect all
normally-closed contacts in series with the EOL resistor and connect all normally-open
contacts in parallel with the EOL resistor. The function of the zones and their response times
are configured using the system programming options. If split EOL is programmed, 24-Hour
Zones or Keyswitch Zones connected in parallel to Zones 1 and 2 act as Zones 5 and 6.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 22.0
Terminals and Descriptions
EN | 93
22.2 Glossary Of Terms
Table 64: Glossary
Term
Description
24-hour zone
A monitored input where tamper switches and emergency switches can be connected.
If one of these switches is violated at any time (whether the system is armed or
disarmed), an alarm is reported.
alarm condition
The status when an alarm system is armed and one of the detection devices is violated.
A 24-Hour zone (for example, a smoke detector) can activate when the system is
armed or disarmed.
answering machine A condition that enables connection with the control panel for remote arming or remote
bypass
programming operations when there is an answering machine or facsimile machine on
the same telephone line.
Armed (System
ON)
A status in which the system is ready to accept alarms.
automatic arming
Programming that allows the system to arm automatically at the same time each day in
AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1.
automatic
disarming
Programming that allows the system to disarm automatically at the same time each day
in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1.
AWAY or #
AWAY Mode
codepad
A codepad button used to execute any given command.
The mode used to arm your system when you leave your premises.
A device that allows you to perform all functions such as arming, disarming, and
programming of your alarm system.
day alarm
detector
Programming that allows a combination of zones to be monitored while the system is
disarmed.
A unit installed as a satellite component in a security system designed to detect an
intruder within a protected area. Some common forms of detection devices are passive
infrared, smoke, photo electric beams, reed switches, and vibration sensors.
dialer
An electronic device that uses tones or pulses to dial an electronic receiver such as a
monitoring station, mobile phone, or pocket pager. It uses the public switched
telephone network to send alarm or supervisory signals.
disarmed
A system status that does not accept alarms, except for 24-hour zones.
dual reporting
Reporting that allows your control panel to transmit alarm signals in two different
reporting formats (for example, the control panel can transmit to a monitoring station
and to a mobile phone, or to two different monitoring stations).
dynamic battery
testing
A method used to monitor and test the condition of your backup battery.
EDMSAT satellite
siren
A self-contained siren unit complete with flashing blue strobe light and a backup
battery that provides a higher level of security for an alarm system.
entry delay
A programmed delay of the system alarm responses that allows a person to enter a
building through the entry door to turn the system off.
entry warning
exit delay
The beeping from a codepad during an entry delay as a reminder to disarm the system.
A programmed delay of the system alarm responses that allows a person to leave a
building after turning the system on.
external equipment Any device connected to a security system, such as a detector, codepad, or siren.
force arming
A method of overriding the safety feature that prevents arming with a faulted zone on a
control panel.
hand-over delay
If a system is armed and Zone 1 is violated, the entry delay starts timing. If Zone 2 is
violated, the entry delay time is handed over to the Zone 2 and so on, to Zones 3 and
4. This is known as sequential hand-over delay.
hand-held radio
remote control
A device used to arm and disarm a security system or to cause a panic alarm.
lockout dialer
A dialer that activates only once per zone per arming cycle.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 22.0
Terminals and Descriptions
EN | 94
Table 64: Glossary (continued)
Term
lockout siren
master code
Description
A siren that activates only once per zone per arming cycle.
A numeric code used for arming and disarming the system, and for allowing access to all
functions available through the codepad.
monitoring station A secure location where a digital receiver monitors a number of alarm systems and
deciphers their alarm transmission reports so the operator can advise the appropriate
authorities to take immediate action.
panic
A condition or type of alarm in which the user requires either immediate police or
medical assistance.
partitioning
phone controller
Splitting a control panel into two separate controllable areas. Partitioning is useful for
securing sheds, dual occupancy dwellings, accessory dwellings, shops, and offices.
A device used to arm a security system over the telephone line, and to acknowledge
domestic alarm reports.
remote radio user A code used to arm and disarm a system from a remote location, using hand-held
code
transmitters (in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1). Remote panic alarms are also allowed.
sealed
Refers to a zone’s status. If a zone is sealed, the detection devices are not violated and
the zone indicator is not lit (that is, a reed switch is closed or a detector is on standby
waiting for an intrusion).
sensor watch
A feature that allows the control panel to recognize when detection devices might have
stopped working. Sensor watch monitors the operation of a zone over a programmed
time period.
silent alarm
An alarm that sounds only at a remote location, and gives no obvious local indication
that an alarm was sent out.
STAY Mode 1
STAY Mode 2
A condition that automatically isolates certain zones when the security system is armed
in this mode. Only the installer can program these zones.
A condition that automatically isolates certain zones when the security system is armed
in this mode. The Master Code holder can program these zones.
telco arming
sequence
A feature that automatically diverts a telephone number to another telephone when a
security system is armed in AWAY Mode, the same as using call forwarding.
telco disarming
sequence
An automatic suspension of diverting of the telephone when the system is disarmed.
unsealed
Refers to a zone’s status. If a zone is unsealed, the detection devices are violated and
the zone indicator is lit (that is, a reed switch is open or a detector noted an intrusion).
user code
zone
A numeric code used to arm and disarm the system.
A monitored input used to activate an alarm. A zone might be set up to activate an alarm
only when the system is armed or to operate whether the system is armed or disarmed.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 22.0
Terminals and Descriptions
EN | 95
22.3 Diagrams
Figure 23: ICP-CC488 Wiring Diagram
1 – 605 plug
7 – Power to external equipment:
12 V @ 400 mA
8 – PIR
9 – Zone 8
10 – Zone 4
11 – Zone 7
12 – Zone 3
13 – Piezo siren
14 – Smoke detector
15 – Strobe
2 – 6 (Red) Telecom line (street)
5 (Yellow) Internal phone line
3 and 4 Not used
2 (Black) Telecom line (street)
1 (Green) Internal phone line
3 – Zone 1
4 – Zone 5
5 – Zone 2
6 – Zone 6
16 – Horn speaker
17 – Codepad
18 – Yellow
19 – Green
20 – Red
21 – Black
22 – Battery
23 – 18 VAC 1.3 A plug pack
(TF008)
24 – Link between +12 V and Comm
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 22.0
Terminals and Descriptions
EN | 96
Figure 24: ICP-CC488 Component Overlay
1 – Socket for telecom lead connect
6 – Battery input
7 – Plug pack input (Bosch TF008)
8 – Relay contact select
9 – Default switch
10 – Programming key
11 – Auxiliary Module: direct link cable
2 – Termination for phone line
OUT – internal phone line
IN – Telecom line (street)
3 – Receiver interface connection
4 – Zone termination strip
5 – Output termination strip
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 22.0
Terminals and Descriptions
EN | 97
Figure 25: DSRF Radio Receiver Wiring Diagram
1
2
1 – ICP-CC488 Control Panel
2 – DSRF Receiver
Wiring and Power Up
Operation
1. Remove power from the control panel.
2. Connect the RF Receiver to the control panel as
shown in Figure 25 on page 97.
Use 0.8 mm (22 gauge) or larger wire. Wire
length must not exceed 300 m (1000 ft).
3. Apply power to the control panel.
The LED shows the status of the DSRF RF
Receiver:
•
•
LED On – the module is functioning normally.
LED Off – a power failure occurred or the
module is not wired correctly.
The red LED in the centre of the module lights.
•
LED turns off momentarily – the module
acknowledged receiving an RF signal from a
remote RF device.
Figure 26:
Telecom Connection Diagram for Australia
5
2
3
2
3
4
1
6
9
7
10
9
7
8
1 – Control panel
2 – Red wire
3 – Yellow wire
8 – Telecom line
9 – Black wire
10 – 611 socket
1 (green): internal phone line
2 (black): telecom line (street)
3 and 4: not connected
5 (yellow): internal phone line
6 (red): telecom line (street)
4 – 6P4C plug (top view)
5 – 605 plug
6 – Internal phones
7 – Green wire
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 22.0
Terminals and Descriptions
EN | 98
Figure 27:
Telecom Connection Diagram for New Zealand
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
8
7
1 – Control panel
2 – Black wire
3 – Red wire
4 – RJ45 plug (top view)
5 – Internal phones
6 – Telecom line
7 – (black): telecom line (street)
(green): internal phone line
(red): telecom line (street)
(yellow): internal phone line
8 – Green wire
9 – Yellow wire
Figure 28:
Telecom Connection Diagram for China
6
7
1
2
3
9
4
5
10
8
1 – Control panel
2 – Red wire
3 – Black wire
4 – 4P4C plug (top view)
5 – RJ12 plug (top view)
6 – Telecom line
8 – Rear view of telephone plate
(green): internal phone line
(black): telecom line (street)
(yellow): internal phone line
(red): telecom line (street)
9 – Yellow wire
10 – Green wire
7 – Internal phones
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 23.0
Appendices
EN | 99
At Bosch Security Systems, Inc., we take anti-
jamming very seriously and have devoted a great
deal of time and money researching this problem.
Our engineers have designed the best possible anti-
jamming procedure known and patented it
accordingly (Patent Number 571994).
23.0 Appendices
23.1 Appendix A – Telephone Anti-
Jamming
There are many companies that import American-
designed products claiming to have anti-jamming,
and they push this feature as if it were a major
breakthrough in control panel technology. This is not
the case because most control panels have some sort
of anti-jamming feature. We can go back to the early
1980s where even the 678 Dialers incorporated a
form of anti-jamming as a standard programmable
option.
Our procedure is very simple and effective because
we never answer the burglar’s phone call and the
Telecom Network automatically clears an
unanswered call in approximately 90 sec. This time is
shorter if the call is originated through the Mobile-
Net Network where it will most likely be in the case
of a true burglary.
When the control panel detects that the phone line
has stopped ringing, it immediately loops the line
and makes its call, thereby transmitting its alarm
message successfully. The line is also automatically
disconnected from the telephones within the
protected premises immediately on an alarm
condition by the control panel to further confuse the
burglar and eliminate the possibility of the burglar
answering the call. In the worst possible case, our
method of anti-jamming delays the alarm signal by
ninety sec, but even more importantly never allows
an audio connection between the burglar and the
control panel.
The important thing to note is that most American-
designed products are primarily aimed at their local
market and telephone networks. When these products
are imported to Australia, their anti-jamming functions
do not perform as they should.
To clear up what anti-jamming is and how it works
needs some understanding of telephone networks. In
America either of the two parties (that is, the one
who initiated the call or the one receiving the call)
can clear the line by placing the hand piece back on
the hook. If you pick up the hand piece again, a dial
tone is received and you can make a new call
immediately. That is not so here in Australia.
All dialing products produced by Bosch Security
Systems, Inc. since 1985 incorporate this true anti-
jamming feature as standard. We do not consider it
an option but a must in any professional security
system.
In Australia, only the calling party can terminate the
call immediately. If you receive a call from someone
and hang up, picking the hand piece back up again
to make a new call only reconnects you to the
original caller. It is impossible to make another call
until the original caller hangs up or you hang up the
phone for ninety sec or longer. Australia is different
and needs a special form of anti-jamming its our
telephone network.
Only Bosch Security Systems, Inc. products have true
anti-jamming. Other manufacturers can offer only
second best because of our patent for this very
unique and effective procedure.
23.2 Appendix B – Test Reports Only
When Armed
The ICP-CC488 Control Panel allows Test Reports
to be sent to the base station receiver to verify that
the dialer is functional. Most alarm dialers allow you
to do this.
There are control panels on the market that, after
making a few unsuccessful call attempts, simply hang
up and wait for ninety sec in an attempt to clear the
jamming incoming call. This may work in some
instances where the caller is not a burglar and is not
deliberately trying to jam the control panel. With this
simple method of hanging up for ninety sec, not only
is the alarm signal delayed for this time, but also the
time taken for the original failed call attempts (these
could easily total 4 min). This is bad enough, but even
more disturbing is that the initial failed call attempts
allow for the establishment of an audio connection
between the would-be burglar and the control panel.
Anyone with a little knowledge of alarm systems can
trick the dialer that it is communicating to a base
station and clear the alarm signal. It is pretty
The one problem is that installations that send
Opening and Closing Reports generally also send a
Test Report each day. This call is unnecessary
because a successful Opening and Closing Report
means that the dialer is functioning correctly.
The ICP-CC488 Control Panel allows you to save
time and money by providing Test Reports only
when the system is armed.
frightening when the control panel you use and
recommend to your customers is supposed to have
anti-jamming.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 24.0
Specifications
EN | 100
Select Option 1 (Send Test Reports only if the system
is armed) in Location 428 (refer to Section 18.5
Consumer Options 1 on page 82) and then set the Test
Report Time to be in the middle of the day. During
Monday to Friday when the premises are generally
open and the system is disarmed, a Test Report is not
sent. On the weekend, the premises are closed and
the system armed, so a Test Report is sent at the
programmed time to verify the operation of the
dialer.
24.0 Specifications
24.1 Warranty Statement
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. warrants this product to
be free from defects in material and workmanship for
a period of three years from the date of manufacture
as indicated by the date stamp or the serial number
on the product.
Defective units returned by the purchaser at their
own expense during this period will be repaired or
replaced at the option of the manufacturer. The
repair or replacement will be free of charge provided
that the defects were not incurred during shipping or
handling, or the damage was not due to causes
beyond the control of Bosch Security Systems, Inc.,
such as lightning, excessive voltage, mechanical
shock, or damage arising out of abuse, alteration, or
improper application of the equipment.
At first glance, this may not seem to be significant,
but by doing a few sums you can see where savings
are possible.
Assume that the customer wants, needs, or has Test
Reports programmed for once per day with Opening
and Closing reports. In this scenario, at least three
phone calls are made each weekday, one call on
Saturday, and one call on Sunday.
By using the ICP-CC488 Control Panel you can
eliminate five calls per week. Over one week, you
save your customer $1.25 and over one year you
save them $65.00.
24.2 Specifications
Table 65: Specifications
Not a bad saving, but remember these figures are for
local calls only.
0oC to +45oC
Temperature Range
(+32oF to +113oF)
Now assume a control room with 1000 customers
sending the same reports. It can expect to receive
884,000 phone calls ($221,000 assuming local calls)
just for reporting Opening, Closing, and Test reports
over a twelve month period.
10% to 95%
TF008 Plug Pack –
240 V/18 VAC @ 1.3 A
65 mA
Humidity
Power Source
Standby Current
115 mA
Current Draw In
Alarm Condition
Current Draw In
Alarm Condition With
Codepad
If you use the ICP-CC488 Control Panel, you can cut
the calls to 624,000 per year (at a value of $156,000
assuming local calls), a saving of $65,000. If we now
assume that for each call one line is printed on the
logging printer, and that one page is filled every 60
calls. You can save 4333 sheets of paper per year and
at approximately $45 per box, this becomes a
considerable saving.
105 mA
6.5 Ah/12 VDC rechargeable
sealed lead acid battery
306 mm x 262 mm x 84 mm
Backup Battery
Dimensions (case,
packed in carton)
(12.05 in. x 10.31 in. x 3.31 in.)
As you can see using the ICP-CC488 Control Panel
saves you money, saves your customer money, and
helps to conserve our natural resources. In fact, the
only organization that doesn’t like this feature is
Telecom.
2.5 kg (5.51 lbs.)
N771
Weight
Supplier Code
New Zealand
Telepermit
ICP-CC488 PTC 211/98/083
24.3 Software Version Number
Refer to Section 7.4.9 Command 999 – Display the Panel
Type or Software Version Number for more information.
24.4 New Zealand Telepermit Notes
•
The grant of a telepermit for a device does not
indicate Telecom acceptance of responsibility for
the correct operation of the device under all
operating conditions.
•
This equipment shall not be used in any manner
that could constitute a nuisance to other Telecom
customers.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 25.0
Programming Sheets
EN | 101
•
•
Disconnect this equipment immediately if it
becomes physically damaged and arrange for its
disposal or repair.
25.0 Programming Sheets
25.1 ICP-CC488 Programming Sheets
The transmit level from this device is set at a
fixed level, so there may be circumstances where
the performance is less than optimal. Before
reporting such occurrences as faults, please check
the line with a standard telepermitted telephone
and do not report a fault if the telephone
performance is satisfactory.
Primary Telephone Number for Receiver 1
000 to 015
Refer to page 49
Location
Default
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Secondary Telephone Number for Receiver 1
016 to 031
Refer to page 49
Location
Default
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Handshake Tone for Receiver 1
032
•
This device is equipped with pulse dialing while
the Telecom standard is DTMF tone dialing.
There is no guarantee that Telecom lines will
always continue to support pulse dialing.
Refer to page 49
Location
1
2
3
4
5
HI-LO handshake (contact ID)
1400 Hz (Ademco TX @ 1900 Hz)
2300 Hz (Low Speed Sescoa)
No handshake
Use of dialing, when this equipment is connected
to the same line as other equipment, may give
rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a
false answer condition. If problems such as this
occur, the user should not contact the Telecom
Faults Service.
Pager
Transmission Format for Receiver 1
033 Refer to page 50
Location
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Contact ID
4 + 2 express
FSK 300 baud
Domestic
Basic pager
Reserved
•
This equipment is set up to carry out test calls at
pre-determined times. These test calls interrupt
other calls that might be set up on the line at the
same time. Discuss the timing set for these test
calls with the installer.
Reserved
Reserved
The timing set for test calls from this equipment
may be subject to drift. If this proves to be
inconvenient and your calls are interrupted,
discuss the problem of timing with the
equipment installer. Do not report the matter as
a fault to Telecom Faults Service.
The Basic Pager option supports only
eight zones due to protocol limitations. If
you use more than eight zones, this option
is not recommended.
•
•
This equipment shall not be set up to make
automatic calls to the Telecom 111 Emergency
Service.
If you use the Zone 16, the 4 + 2 Express
and FSK 300 Baud formats are not
recommended because Zone 16 will be
assigned as "0" and some receivers will
not support this zone.
This equipment should not be used under any
circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to
other Telecom customers.
Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1
034 to 039
Refer to page 50
0 0 0 0 0 0
Location
Default
In the event of any problem with this device,
disconnect the system battery, AC MAINS
supply, and the telephone line. The user must
arrange with the supplier of the device for the
necessary repairs.
Primary Telephone Number for Receiver 2
040 to 055
Refer to page 49
Location
Default
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Secondary Telephone Number for Receiver 2
If the matter is reported to Telecom as a wiring
fault and the fault is proven to be due to this
product, a call-out charge will be incurred.
056 to 071
Refer to page 49
Location
Default
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Handshake Tone for Receiver 2
072
24.5 A-Tick
The ICP-CC488 Control Panel is designed to comply
with A-Tick.
Refer to page 49
Location
1
2
3
4
5
HI-LO handshake (contact ID)
1400 Hz (Ademco TX @ 1900 Hz)
2300 Hz (low speed Sescoa)
No handshake
Pager
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 25.0
Programming Sheets
Telephone Line Fault Options
EN | 102
Transmission Format for Receiver 2
073
Refer to page 50
Location
176
Refer to page 52
Location
Default
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Contact ID
4 + 2 express
FSK 300 baud
Domestic
Basic pager
Reserved
0
Display FAULT indicator if telephone line fails
Sound alarm when system is armed if telephone
line fails
Sound alarm when system is disarmed if
telephone line fails
Reserved
4
8
Reserved
Reserved
Dialer Options 1
177
Refer to page 52
Location
The Basic Pager option supports only
1
2
4
8
Dialer reporting functions allowed
Remote arming by telephone
Answering machine bypass only when armed
Use Bell 103 for FSK format (disabled – CCITT
v21)
eight zones due to protocol limitations. If
you use more than eight zones, this option
is not recommended.
If you use the Zone 16, the 4 + 2 Express
and FSK 300 Baud formats are not
recommended because Zone 16 will be
assigned as "0" and some receivers will
not support this zone.
Dialer Options 2
178
Refer to page 53
0
Location
Default
1
2
4
8
Open/Close Reports only after alarm
Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 2
Open/Close Reports in STAY Mode allowed
Delay siren until transmission complete
Extend wait for handshake from 30 sec to 60 sec
074 to 079
Refer to page 50
0 0 0 0 0 0
Location
Default
Dialing Format
080
Dialer Options 3
Refer to page 50
Location
179
Refer to page 53
2
Location
Default
1
2
3
4
5
6
Australian DTMF (5 digits/sec)
Australian decadic
Alternate DTMF and Australian decadic
International DTMF
Reversed decadic
Alternate DTMF and reversed decadic
1
2
4
8
Set DTMF dialing pulses to 1 digit/sec
Lockout telephone line fail alarm
Change decadic dialing to 60/40
Reserved
Alarm Link Options
180
Upload/download allowed
Reserved
Location
Refer to page 41
Location
081 to 112
1
2
Callback phone number required for
upload/download
Telco Arming Sequence
113 to 142
Refer to page 50
Location
Default
4
8
Exit upload/download connection on alarm
Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Telco Disarming Sequence
143 to 158
Refer to page 51
Location
Default
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Callback Telephone Number
159 to 174
Refer to page 51
Location
Default
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Ring Count
175
Refer to page 51
8
Location
Default
0
Panel will not answer
1 to 13
14
15
Number of rings until panel answers
Answering machine bypass 2
Answering machine bypass 1
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 25.0
Programming Sheets
EN | 103
Installer Code
Day Alarm Zones
181 to 184
185 to 264
Refer to page 54
1 2 3 4
265
Refer to page 56
Location
Default
Location
Default
1
2
4
8
0
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
User Codes
Location
Refer to page 54
Locations 185 to 189
User Code 1
Default
2 5 8 0
Locations 190 to 194
15 15 15 15
Locations 195 to 199
15 15 15 15
Locations 200 to 204
15 15 15 15
Locations 205 to 209
15 15 15 15
Locations 210 to 214
15 15 15 15
Locations 215 to 219
15 15 15 15
Locations 220 to 224
0 15 15 15
Locations 225 to 229
15 15 15 15
Locations 230 to 234
15 15 15 15
Locations 235 to 239
15 15 15 15
Locations 240 to 244
15 15 15 15
Locations 245 to 249
15 15 15 15
Locations 250 to 254
15 15 15 15
Locations 255 to 259
15 15 15 15
Locations 260 to 264
15 15 15 15
10
EOL Resistor Value
266
User Code 2
Default
User Code 3
Default
User Code 4
Default
User Code 5
Default
User Code 6
Default
User Code 7
Default
User Code 8
Default
Radio Code 9
Default
Radio Code 10
Default
Radio Code 11
Default
Radio Code 12
Default
Radio Code 13
Default
Radio Code 14
Default
Radio Code 15
Default
Radio Code 16
Default
Refer to page 56
Location
2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
No EOL resistor
1K (brown, black, red)
1K5 (brown, green, red)
2K2 (red, red, red)
3K3 (orange, orange, black, brown) 1%
3K9 (orange, white, red)
2
2
2
4K7 (yellow, white, red)
5K6 (green, blue, red)
6K8 (blue, grey, black, brown) 1%
10K (brown, black, orange)
2
2
10 12K (brown, red, orange)
11 22K (red, red, orange)
12 Reserved
13 Reserved
14 Split EOL (3K3/6K8) with tamper (1K)
15 Split EOL (3K3/6K8) 1% resistors
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
User Code Priority Levels
Priority
Description
Arm/disarm
Arm only
Arm/disarm and Open/Close Reports
Arm only and Close Report
Arm/disarm and code to isolate
Arm/disarm, code to isolate, and
Open/Close Reports
0
1
2
3
4
6
8
Arm/disarm and Master Code functions
10
Arm/disarm, Master Code functions, and
Open/Close Reports
12
14
Arm/disarm, Master Code functions, and
code to isolate
Arm/disarm, Master Code functions, code
to isolate, and Open/Close Reports
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 25.0
Programming Sheets
EN | 104
Zones
Zone Types
267 to 378
Refer to page 58
Locations 267 to 273
2 0 0 1 14 1 1
Location
Zone 1
These are the zone types available:
Zone Type Description
Default
Zone 2
Default
Zone 3
Default
Zone 4
Default
Zone 5
Default
Zone 6
Default
Zone 7
Default
Zone 8
Default
Zone 9
Default
Zone 10
Default
Zone 11
Default
Zone 12
Default
Zone 13
Default
Zone 14
Default
Zone 15
Default
Zone 16
Default
0
Instant
Locations 274 to 280
1 0 0 1 14 1 1
Locations 281 to 287
1 0 0 1 14 1 1
Locations 288 to 294
1 0 0 1 14 1 1
Locations 295 to 301
0 0 0 1 14 1 1
Locations 302 to 308
0 0 0 1 14 1 1
Locations 309 to 315
0 0 0 1 12 1 1
Locations 316 to 322
9 0 0 1 12 1 1
Locations 323 to 329
15 0 0 1 14 1 1
Locations 330 to 336
15 0 0 1 14 1 1
Locations 337 to 343
15 0 0 1 14 1 1
Locations 344 to 350
15 0 0 1 14 1 1
Locations 351 to 357
15 0 0 1 14 1 1
Locations 358 to 364
15 0 0 1 14 1 1
Locations 365 to 371
15 0 0 1 14 1 1
Locations 372 to 378
15 0 0 1 14 1 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Handover
Delay-1
Delay-2
Reserved
Reserved
24-Hour Medical
24-Hour Panic
24-Hour Holdup
24-Hour Tamper
Reserved
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Keyswitch
24-Hour Burglary
24-Hour Fire
Chime only
Zone not used
Zone Pulse Count Settings
Program the pulse count settings for each zone from
0 to 15.
Zone Pulse Count Time
Zone pulse count time is the time frame or period
over which the number of pulses must register.
20 ms Loop Response
Option Time (sec)
150 ms Loop Response
Option Time (sec)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0.5
1
2
3
4
5
10
15
8
20
9
30
10
11
12
13
14
15
40
50
60
90
120
200
Each zone contains seven locations. The first three
locations determine how the zone operates:
Zone Options 1
Zone Type
Zone Pulse
Count
Zone Pulse
Count Time
Option Description
1
2
4
8
Lockout siren/lockout dialer
Delay alarm reporting
Silent alarm
The next two locations contain zone options:
Zone Options 1
Zone Options 2
Sensor watch
The last two locations contain reporting information:
Zone Options 2
Report Code
Dialer Options
Option Description
1
2
4
8
Isolated in STAY Mode 1
Zone isolation allowed
Forced arming allowed
Enable Zone Restore Report
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 25.0
Programming Sheets
Zone Status – Alarm Restore Code
EN | 105
Zone Dialer Options
Option Description
391
Refer to page 66
Location
Default
0
1
2
4
8
No report required
Receiver 1
Receiver 2
Receiver 1 and 2
Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1 fails
14
Zone Status Reporting Options
392
Refer to page 66
Location
0
1
2
4
8
No report required
Receiver 1
Receiver 2
Receiver 1 and 2
Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1 fails
Zone Descriptions
Use this table as a reference to indicate what each
zone is connected to.
Zone
Description
RF Supervision Time
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
393
Refer to page 66
0
Increments of 6 hr (0 to 90 hr)
Location
Default
Location 393
RF Low Battery Report
394 to 395
Refer to page 66
6 8
RF Low Battery Report
RF Low Battery Restore Report
Location
Default
Location 394
Location 395
Swinger Shutdown Count for Siren
RF Receiver Trouble Report
379
Refer to page 64
3
Location
Default
396 to 397
Refer to page 66
7 9
Location
Default
Swinger Shutdown Count for Dialer
Location 396
Location 397
Tens digit
Units digit
380
Refer to page 64
6
Location
Default
RF Receiver Trouble Restore Report
Zone Status – Zone Tamper Report
398 to 399
Refer to page 67
7 11
Location
Default
381 to 382
Refer to page 65
0 0
Zone Tamper Report
Zone Tamper Restore Report
Location
Default
Location 381
Location 382
Location 398
Location 394
Tens digit
Units digit
RF Dialer Options
400
Zone Status – Walk Test Report
Refer to page 67
Location
383 to 384
Refer to page 65
0 0
Walk Test Enable Report
Walk Test Disable Report
Location
Default
Location 383
Location 384
0
1
2
4
8
No report required
Receiver 1
Receiver 2
Receiver 1 and 2
Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1 fails
Zone Status – Bypass Reports
385 to 386
Refer to page 65
9 8
Location
Default
Open/Close Reports
401 to 402
Refer to page 67
11 12
Location
Default
Location 385
Location 386
Zone Bypass Report
Zone Bypass Restore Report
Location 401
Location 402
Opening Report
Closing Report
Zone Status – Trouble Reports
387 to 388
Refer to page 65
2 3
Location
Default
Open/Close Reporting Options
403
Refer to page 67
Location
Location 387
Location 388
Zone Trouble Report
Zone Trouble Restore Report
0
1
2
4
8
No report required
Receiver 1
Receiver 2
Receiver 1 and 2
Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1 fails
Zone Status – Sensor Watch Reports
389 to 390
Refer to page 66
4 5
Location
Default
Codepad Duress Report
Location 389
Location 390
Sensor Watch Report
Sensor Watch Restore Report
404
Refer to page 67
6
Location
Default
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 25.0
Programming Sheets
Test Reporting Time
EN | 106
Codepad Panic Report
405 to 406
Refer to page 67
Location
Default
428 to 434
Refer to page 69
0 0 0 0 7 1 0
Hour of the day – tens digit
Location
Default
7 15
Location 428
Location 429
Location 430
Location 431
Location 432
Location 433
Location 434
Codepad Fire Report
Hour of the day – units digit
Minute of the day – tens digit
Minute of the day – units digit
Test Report code – tens digit
Test Report code – units digit
Repeat interval in days
407 to 408
Refer to page 68
7 14
Location
Default
Codepad Medical Report
409 to 410
Refer to page 68
7 13
Location
Default
Codepad Reporting Options
411
Test Reporting Dialer Options
435
Refer to page 68
Location
Refer to page 70
Location
0
1
2
4
8
No report required
Receiver 1
Receiver 2
Receiver 1 and 2
Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1 fails
0
1
2
4
8
No report required
Receiver 1
Receiver 2
Receiver 1 and 2
Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1 fails
System Status – AUX Power Supply Fail Report
Output Configurations
412 to 413
Refer to page 68
10 3
Location
Default
436 to 465
Refer to page 70
Locations 436 to 441
1 14 0 0 0 0
Locations 442 to 447
2 7 10 2 1 5
Location
Output 1
System Status – AUX Power Supply Fail Restore
Report
Default for horn speaker
Output 2
414 to 415
Refer to page 68
10 8
Location
Default
Default for Fire Alarm
verification
Locations 444 to 453
Strobe
System Status – AC Fail Report
2 0 6 4 0 8
Default for strobe (reset in 8 hr)
416 to 417
Refer to page 68
10 2
Location
Default
Locations 454 to 459
1 15 1 0 0 0
Locations 460 to 465
0 13 2 1 0 1
Relay
Default for sirens running
Codepad
Default for entry/Exit Warning
and Delay Alarm
System Status – AC Fail Restore Report
418 to 419
Refer to page 68
10 7
Location
Default
Outputs are programmed with four parameters in six
locations:
System Status – Low Battery Report
420 to 421
Refer to page 69
10 1
Location
Default
Event Type
Polarity Time Base
Time Multiplier
System Status – Low Battery Restore Report
Entry Time 1
422 to 423
Refer to page 69
10 6
Location
Default
466 to 467
Refer to page 78
4 1
Increments of 1 sec (0 to 15 sec)
Increments of 16 sec (0 to 240 sec)
Location
Default
Location 466
Location 467
System Status – Access Denied
424 to 426
Refer to page 69
6 7 12
Location
Default
Entry Time 2
Location 424
Location 425
Location 426
Code retries
Reporting code – tens digit
Reporting code – units digit
468 to 469
Refer to page 78
8 2
Location
Default
Location 468
Location 469
Increments of 1 sec (0 to 15 sec)
Increments of 16 sec (0 to 240 sec)
System Status Reporting Options
427
Refer to page 69
Location
Exit Time
0
1
2
4
8
No report required
Receiver 1
Receiver 2
Receiver 1 and 2
Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1 fails
470 to 471
Refer to page 78
12 3
Location
Default
Location 470
Location 471
Increments of 1 sec (0 to 15 sec)
Increments of 16 sec (0 to 240 sec)
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 25.0
Programming Sheets
Speaker Beep Volume
EN | 107
Entry Guard Time for STAY Mode
472 to 473
Refer to page 78
0 0
491
Refer to page 80
Location
Default
Location
Default
0
13
Location 472
Location 473
Increments of 1 sec (0 to 15 sec)
Increments of 16 sec (0 to 240 sec)
No beeps
Loudest beeps
15
Delay Alarm Reporting Time
System Options 1
492
474 to 475
Refer to page 78
0 0
Refer to page 80
Location
Default
Location
1
2
4
8
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. smart lockout allowed
Horn speaker monitor
Strobe indications for radio arm/disarm
Assign button 4 on transmitter to operate STAY
Mode 1
Location 474
Location 475
Increments of 1 sec (0 to 15 sec)
Increments of 16 sec (0 to 240 sec)
Sensor Watch Time
476 to 477
Refer to page 66
0 0
Location
Default
System Options 2
493
0
Refer to page 81
Location
Default
Location 476
Location 477
Increments of days (tens digit)
Increments of days (units digit)
1
2
4
8
Codepad Panic to be silent
Codepad Fire to be silent
Codepad Medical to be silent
Codepad Lockout Time
478
Refer to page 79
0
Location
Default
Access denied (code retries) to be silent
Location 478
Increments of 10 sec
System Options 3
494
Siren Run Time
Refer to page 81
Location
479
Refer to page 79
5
Location
Default
1
2
4
8
AC fail after 1 hour (disabled – after 2 min)
Ignore AC fail
Pulse count handover allowed
Handover delay to be sequential
Location 479
Increments of 1 minute
Siren Sound Rate (Slow <- Sound -> Fast)
480
Refer to page 79
7
Location
Default
System Options 4
495
0
Refer to page 82
Location
Default
Auto Arming Pre-Alert Time
481
Refer to page 79
1
Location
Default
1
2
4
8
Panel to power up disarmed (if power reset)
Arm/disarm tracking on power up
Internal crystal to keep time
Location 481
Increments of 5 min
Night arm station, or RE005 installed
Auto Arming Time
Consumer Options 1
482 to 485
Refer to page 79
0 0 0 0
Location
496
0
Refer to page 82
Location
Default
Default
Location 482
Location 483
Location 484
Location 485
Hour of the day – tens digit
Hour of the day – units digit
Minute of the day – tens digit
Minute of the day – units digit
1
2
4
8
Test reports only when armed
Test report after siren reset
Auto arm in STAY Mode 1
STAY indicator to display Day Alarm status
Auto Disarming Time
Consumer Options 2
497
486 to 489
Refer to page 79
0 0 0 0
Location
Default
Refer to page 83
Location
Location 486
Location 487
Location 488
Location 489
Hour of the day – tens digit
1
2
Codepad display extinguishes after 60 sec
Single button arming allowed (AWAY/STAY Modes
1 and 2)
Single button disarming allowed (STAY Modes 1
and 2)
Alarm memory reset on disarm
Hour of the day – units digit
Minute of the day – tens digit
Minute of the day – units digit
4
8
Kiss-Off Wait Time
490
Refer to page 80
3
Location
Default
Location 490
Increments of 500 ms
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 25.0
Programming Sheets
Zone Allocations for Area 1 and Area 2
EN | 108
Consumer Options 3
498
Refer to page 83
518 to 533
Refer to page 85
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Area 1 – Zone 1 indicator
Location
Location
Default
1
2
Codepad fault beeps allowed
Use digit 3 for Codepad Duress Alarm (instead of
digit 9)
Alarms activate sirens and strobe outputs in STAY
Mode 1 and 2
Zone Tamper Alarm to be silent
Location 518
Location 519
Location 520
Location 521
Location 522
Location 523
Location 524
Location 525
Location 526
Location 527
Location 528
Location 529
Location 530
Location 531
Location 532
Location 533
0-15
Area 1 – Zone 2 indicator
Area 1 – Zone 3 indicator
Area 1 – Zone 4 indicator
Area 1 – Zone 5 indicator
Area 1 – Zone 6 indicator
Area 1 – Zone 7 indicator
Area 1 – Zone 8 indicator
Area 2 – Zone 1 indicator
Area 2 – Zone 2 indicator
Area 2 – Zone 3 indicator
Area 2 – Zone 4 indicator
Area 2 – Zone 5 indicator
Area 2 – Zone 6 indicator
Area 2 – Zone 7 indicator
Area 2 – Zone 8 indicator
Mapping zone 1-16 to this LED
4
8
Radio Input Options
499
0
DSRF Receiver
Latching keyswitch input
Momentary keyswitch input
Reserved
Refer to page 83
Location
Default
1
2
4
8
Partitioning Options 1
500
0
Refer to page 85
Location
Default
1
2
3
4
First to open/last to close reporting
Area 1 codepad connected to data terminal
Reset sirens from any area allowed
Master codepad to display AUX indicator when
online
User Code Allocations
534 to 549
Refer to page 86
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Location
Default
Partitioning Options 2
Location 534
Location 535
Location 536
Location 537
Location 538
Location 539
Location 540
Location 541
Location 542
Location 543
Location 544
Location 545
Location 546
Location 547
Location 548
Location 549
User Code 1
User Code 2
User Code 3
User Code 4
User Code 5
User Code 6
User Code 7
User Code 8
User Code 9
User Code 10
User Code 11
User Code 12
User Code 13
User Code 14
User Code 15
User Code 16
501
0
Refer to page 85
Location
Default
1
2
Lock Area 1 to Receiver 1 and Area 2 to Receiver 2
User Code allowed to arm/disarm both areas at the
same time
Reserved
Reserved
4
8
Zone Allocations Enabled for Area 1 and Area 2
502 to 517
Refer to page 86
Location
Default
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Area 1 – Zone 1 indicator
Location 502
Location 503
Location 504
Location 505
Location 506
Location 507
Location 508
Location 509
Location 510
Location 511
Location 512
Location 513
Location 514
Location 515
Location 516
Location 517
Area 1 – Zone 2 indicator
Area 1 – Zone 3 indicator
Area 1 – Zone 4 indicator
Area 1 – Zone 5 indicator
Area 1 – Zone 6 indicator
Area 1 – Zone 7 indicator
Area 1 – Zone 8 indicator
Area 2 – Zone 1 indicator
Area 2 – Zone 2 indicator
Area 2 – Zone 3 indicator
Area 2 – Zone 4 indicator
Area 2 – Zone 5 indicator
Area 2 – Zone 6 indicator
Area 2 – Zone 7 indicator
Area 2 – Zone 8 indicator
Domestic Telephone Numbers
550 to 597
598
Refer to page 43
Location
Reserved
Location
0
1
Not mapped for this LED
This LED used, a zone is mapped to it
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 25.0
Programming Sheets
RF Device Mapping (Devices 9 to 16)
EN | 109
RF Options
624 to 631
Refer to page 89
Location
599
0
Refer to page 88
Location
Default
Location
Default
Map RF Device 9 to Zone (1
to 16)
Map RF Device 10 to Zone
(1 to 16)
Map RF Device 11 to Zone
(1 to 16)
Map RF Device 12 to Zone
(1 to 16)
Map RF Device 13 to Zone
(1 to 16)
Map RF Device 14 to Zone
(1 to 16)
Map RF Device 15 to Zone
(1 to 16)
Map RF Device 16 to Zone
(1 to 16)
624
08
1
2
4
Sound siren on RF receiver fail
Sound siren on RF receiver tamper/jamming
Unseal zone that fails supervision (if supervision is
enabled)
Enable RF jamming monitoring
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
8
RF Device Mapping Option
Location
600 to 615
Location
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
Default
Map RF Device 1
Map RF Device 2
Map RF Device 3
Map RF Device 4
Map RF Device 5
Map RF Device 6
Map RF Device 7
Map RF Device 8
Map RF Device 9
Map RF Device 10
Map RF Device 11
Map RF Device 12
Map RF Device 13
Map RF Device 14
Map RF Device 15
Map RF Device 16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0-15
Mapping RF device to zone 1-16
RF Device Signal Strength (Devices 1 to 8)
801 to 808
Refer to page 110
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Location
Default
Location 801
Location 802
Location 803
Location 804
Location 805
Location 806
Location 807
Location 808
0-15
Device 1
Device 2
Device 3
Device 4
Device 5
Device 6
Device 7
Device 8
0
1
Mapping Disable
Mapping Enable
RF Device Mapping (Devices 1 to 8)
Mapping RF Device to Zone 1-16
Location
616 to 623
Refer to page 89
Default
RF Device Signal Strength (Devices 9 to 16)
Location
616
809 to 816
Location
Map RF Device 1 to Zone (1
to 16)
00
Location Default
Signal Strength for RF Device 9
Signal Strength for RF Device 10
Signal Strength for RF Device 11
Signal Strength for RF Device 12
Signal Strength for RF Device 13
Signal Strength for RF Device 14
Signal Strength for RF Device 15
Signal Strength for RF Device 16
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Map RF Device 2 to Zone (1
to 16)
Map RF Device 3 to Zone (1
to 16)
Map RF Device 4 to Zone (1
to 16)
Map RF Device 5 to Zone (1
to 16)
Map RF Device 6 to Zone (1
to 16)
Map RF Device 7 to Zone (1
to 16)
Map RF Device 8 to Zone (1
to 16)
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Reserved
836 to 837
Location
Default
Location 836
Location 837
0-15
Mapping RF device to zone 1-16
Country Code
Location
838 to 839
Refer to page 89
Location
Default
Country Code (tens digit)
Country Code (units digit)
838
839
0
2
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 25.0
Programming Sheets
EN | 110
System Date
Disable Factory Default
905 to 910
Refer to page 80
0 1 0 1 0 1
Day of the month – tens digit
Day of the month – units digit
Month of the year – tens digit
Month of the year – units digit
Year – tens digit
Location
900
Refer to page 39
Location
Default
0
15
Defaulting enabled
Defaulting disabled
Location 905
Location 906
Location 907
Location 908
Location 909
Location 910
System Time
901 to 904
Refer to page 80
0 0 0 0
Location
Default
Location 901
Location 902
Location 903
Location 904
Hour of the day – tens digit
Year – units digit
Hour of the day – units digit
Minute of the day – tens digit
Minute of the day – units digit
26.0 Country Codes
The PSTN provides a programmable line interface to meet international telephone line requirements. This
program meets various country PTT standards.
Country
Code
Country
Code Country
Code
Country
Code Country
Code
Argentina
0 1
Poland
4 1
Liechtenstein
6 3
Gabon
6 5
Papua New
Guinea
6 5
Australia
Austria
0 2
0 3
0 4
Portugal
Romania
4 2
4 3
4 4
Gambia
Ghana
6 5
6 5
6 5
Paraguay
Rwanda
St. Lucia
6 5
6 5
6 5
Afghanistan
Albania
6 5
6 5
Belgium
Russian
Federation
Brazil
0 5
0 6
Saudi
Arabia
4 5
4 6
Andorra
Angola
6 5
6 5
Grenada
6 5
6 5
Samoa
Eastern
6 5
6 5
Bulgaria
Serbia and
Guatemala
San Marino
Montenegro
Canada
0 7
Singapore
4 7
Antigua and
Barbuda
6 5
Guinea
6 5
Sao Tome
and Principe
6 5
China
0 8
0 9
1 0
1 1
1 2
Slovakia
Slovenia
4 8
4 9
Azerbaijan
Bahamas
Bangladesh
Barbados
Belize
6 5
6 5
6 5
6 5
6 5
Guyana
Haiti
6 5
6 5
6 5
6 5
6 5
Saint Vincent 6 5
Colombia
Croatia
Cyprus
Senegal
6 5
6 5
6 5
6 5
South Africa 5 0
Vatican
Honduras
Iran
Seychelles
Sierra Leone
Solomon Is
Spain
5 1
5 2
Czech
Sweden
Republic
Denmark
Egypt
1 3
1 4
Switzerland
5 3
5 4
Benin
6 5
6 5
Iraq
6 5
6 5
Somali
6 5
6 5
Taiwan,
China
Bhutan
Ivory Coast
Sri Lanka
Estonia
Finland
France
1 5
1 6
1 7
Thailand
Turkey
5 5
5 6
5 7
Bolivia
6 5
6 5
6 5
Jamaica
Kenya
6 5
6 5
6 5
Sudan
6 5
6 5
6 5
Suriname
Swaziland
United
Kingdom
Botswana
Brunei
Kiribati
Germany
Greece
1 8
1 9
2 0
United
States
5 8
5 9
6 0
6 5
6 5
6 5
Kuwait
Laos
6 5
6 5
6 5
Tajikistan
Tanzania
Togo
6 5
6 5
6 5
Venezuela
Burkina-faso
Burma
Hong Kong,
PRC
Vietnam
Lesotho
Hungary
India
2 1
2 2
2 3
Burundi
6 5
6 5
6 5
Liberia
6 5
6 5
6 5
Tuvalu
6 5
6 5
6 5
Armenia
Belarus
6 2
6 2
Cambodia
Cameroon
Libya
Uganda
Indonesia
Madagascar
United Arab
Emirates
Ireland
2 4
Georgia
6 2
Cape Verde
6 5
Malawi
6 5
Uruguay
6 5
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | 25.0
Programming Sheets
EN | 111
Country
Code
Country
Code Country
Code
Country
Code Country
Code
Italy
2 5
Jordan
6 2
Central African 6 5
Maldives
6 5
Uzbekistan
6 5
Republic
Japan
2 6
2 7
Kazakhstan
Kyrgyzstan
6 2
6 2
Chad
Chile
6 5
6 5
Mali
6 5
6 5
Vanuatu
Yemen
6 5
6 5
Korea, South
Marshall
Islands
Latvia
2 8
2 9
3 0
3 1
3 2
3 3
Moldova
Oman
6 2
6 2
6 2
6 2
6 2
6 2
Comoros
Congo
6 5
6 5
6 5
6 5
6 5
6 5
Mauritania
Mauritius
Micronesia
Monaco
6 5
6 5
6 5
6 5
6 5
Lithuania
Luxembourg
Macedonia
Malaysia
Malta
Pakistan
Qatar
Costa Rica
Cuba
Syria
Djibouti
Mongolia
Ukraine
Dominica Rep.
Mozambique 6 5
Mexico
3 4
3 5
3 6
East Timor
Ecuador
6 5
6 5
6 5
Namibia
Nauru
6 5
6 5
6 5
Netherlands
New Zealand
Algeria
Bahrain
6 3
6 3
El Salvador
Nepal
Nigeria
3 7
French
Polynesia
6 3
Equatorial Gui
nea
6 5
Nicaragua
6 5
Norway
Peru
3 8
3 9
4 0
Iceland
Israel
6 3
6 3
6 3
Eritrea
Ethiopia
Fiji
6 5
6 5
6 5
Niger
6 5
6 5
6 5
Palau
Philippines
Lebanon
Panama
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | Index
EN | 112
Notes
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | Index
EN | 113
Index
FAULT...............................................................11, 13
FAULT Indicator ...................................................12
MAINS.....................................................................11
MAINS Indicator ...................................................12
Off Indicator ...........................................................12
On Indicator............................................................12
STAY .......................................................................10
STAY Indicator ......................................................11
System Disarmed....................................................12
A
AC Mains
Fail In 1 Hour......................................................... 81
Ignore Fail Indication............................................ 82
Access Codes
Installer Code......................................................... 54
User Codes.............................................................. 54
Access Denied To Be Silent.........................................81
Alarm Link
Zone Indicators.......................................................11
Codepad Medical....................................................17, 81
Codepad Medical To Be Silent................................... 81
Codepad Panic ........................................................16, 81
Codepad Panic To Be Silent........................................ 81
Command 959 - Test Programming Key................... 36
Command 960 - Exit Installer's Programming Mode
..................................................................................... 37
Command 961 - Reset Control Panel Back To
Factory Default.......................................................... 37
Command 965 - Set Up Domestic Dialing................ 38
Command 966 - Enable/Disable Automatic Stepping
..................................................................................... 38
Command 999 - Display Panel Type/Software
Version ....................................................................... 39
Communciation Fail ..................................................... 18
Consumer Options 1
Direct Connect....................................................... 41
Enable Alarm Link Call Back.............................. 41
Initiate Modem Call .............................................. 33
Remote Connect With Call Back Verification .. 41
Remote Connect With Customer Control ......... 40
Remote Connect Without Call Back Verification41
Terminate Session If Report Pending ................. 42
Alarm Link Software.....................................................91
Answering Machine Bypass .........................................51
Area Display Indicators................................................13
Area On/Off Indicators................................................12
Arming
Both Areas At Same Time..............................27, 32
In AWAY Mode .................................................... 14
In STAY Mode 1 .............................................14, 32
In STAY Mode 2 .............................................15, 32
Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1........................................82
Automatic Stepping Of Locations...............................38
AWAY Indicator..................................................... 10, 11
AWAY Mode
Arming..................................................................... 14
Disarming................................................................ 14
Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1.................................82
Enable STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm
Status ....................................................................83
Send Test Reports Only If Armed.......................82
Control Panel To Power Up Disarmed...................... 82
CP5 Eight Zone Codepad............................................ 91
D
B
Date and Time............................................................... 31
Day Alarm
Operation ................................................................56
Bell Test ..........................................................................33
Bypass Reports...............................................................65
Status Indicator.......................................................83
C
Turning On/Off......................................................33
Defaulting The Control Panel ..................................... 37
Delete
Call Back Telephone Number.....................................51
Codepad
Determine Area...................................................... 33
Codepad Duress.............................................................16
Codepad Fire........................................................... 17, 81
Codepad Fire To Be Silent...........................................81
Codepad Indicators
AWAY..................................................................... 10
AWAY Indicator.................................................... 11
RF Zones .................................................................23
Dialer Information
Answering Machine Bypass..................................51
Call Back Telephone Number..............................51
Dialing Format........................................................50
Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 .....49
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | Index
EN | 114
Programming Telephone Numbers..................... 48
Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1............... 50
Telco Arming Sequence........................................ 50
Telephone Line Fault Options.................52, 80, 84
Disarming
Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones..........................25, 30
Telephone Monitor Mode.....................................25
Installer's Programming Commands
959 - Test Programming Key................................36
960 - Exit Installer's Programming Mode...........37
Automatic................................................................ 79
Both Areas At Same Time..............................27, 32
From AWAY Mode............................................... 14
Domestic Dialing
961 - Reset Control Panel Back To Factory Default
...............................................................................37
965 - Set Up Domestic Dialing.............................38
966 - Automatic Stepping Of Locations..............38
Command 965........................................................ 38
Disable...............................................................25, 30
Format ..................................................................... 42
Function................................................................... 42
Duress Alarm..................................................................16
999 - Display Panel Type/Software Version
Number................................................................39
Introduction ......................................................................8
Invalid Code.................................................................. 81
Isolate In STAY Mode 1.............................................. 63
Isolating Allowed .......................................................... 63
Isolating Zones............................................................... 17
E
L
EDM Smart Watch........................................................80
EDMSAT........................................................................71
Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode.................. 14, 15
Exit Installer's Programming Mode ............................37
Latching Outputs
Resetting..................................................................33
Lockout Dialer............................................................... 61
Lockout Siren................................................................. 61
F
Fault Analysis Mode......................................................18
Exit........................................................................... 33
Fault Descriptions
M
MAINS Indicator....................................................11, 12
Master Code Function
Arm/Disarm Both Areas At Same Time.......27, 32
Changing & Deleting User Codes........................27
Setting Date and Time...........................................31
Turning Outputs ON/OFF ...................................30
Walk Test Mode.....................................................31
Master Partitioned Codepad
Communciation Fail.............................................. 18
Sensor Watch.......................................................... 18
FAULT Indicator..............................................11, 12, 13
Features
ICP-CC488 ................................................................8
Fire Alarm.......................................................................17
Forced Arming..................................................14, 15, 16
Area Display Indicators.........................................13
Area On/Off Indicators.........................................12
H
Zone Indicators.......................................................12
Medical Alarm............................................................... 17
Modem Call................................................................... 33
Handover........................................................................60
Hold Down Function
Arm In STAY Mode 1.......................................... 32
Arm In STAY Mode 2.......................................... 32
Bell Test................................................................... 33
Initiate Modem Call .............................................. 33
Reset Latching Outputs......................................... 33
Send Test Report ................................................... 34
Strobe Test.............................................................. 33
Turning Day Alarm On/Off................................. 33
N
New Zealand Telepermit Notes................................ 100
Night Arm Station......................................................... 91
O
Off Indicator.................................................................. 12
On Indicator .................................................................. 12
Option Bits..................................... 36, 41, 52, 56, 61, 63
Optional Equipment
I
Installer Code.................................................................54
Installer Code Function
Change Telco Arm/Disarm Sequence..........24, 29
2 Channel Radio Interface....................................90
8 Zone LED Codepad ...........................................91
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | Index
EN | 115
Night Arm Station.................................................. 91
Programming Key.................................................. 91
TF008 Plug Pack .................................................... 91
Output Event Type
Global Chime .........................................................75
Horn Speaker..........................................................73
Horn Speaker Monitor Fail...................................72
Kiss-Off After Exit Time .......................................71
Kiss-Off Received...................................................72
Low Battery.............................................................72
Mimic System Fault ...............................................73
Mimic Zone 1 .........................................................75
Mimic Zone 2 .........................................................75
Mimic Zone 3 .........................................................75
Mimic Zone 4 .........................................................75
Mimic Zone 6 .........................................................75
Mimic Zone 7 .........................................................75
Mimic Zone 8 .........................................................75
Radio Control Output 1........................................74
Radio Control Output 1 - Not In AWAY Mode74
Radio Control Output 2........................................74
Radio Control Output 2 - Not In AWAY Mode74
Remote Control 1...................................................74
Remote Control 2...................................................74
Remote Control 3...................................................74
Ring Detect .............................................................74
Sensor Watch Alarm..............................................73
Silent Alarm ............................................................73
Sirens Running .......................................................73
Strobe Operating....................................................73
System Armed ........................................................71
System Disarmed....................................................71
Telephone Line Fail...............................................72
Zone Not Sealed.....................................................75
Zone Not Sealed After Exit Time........................75
AC Fail .................................................................... 72
AC Mains 60 Hz or 50 Hz.................................... 75
Alarm When In AWAY Mode............................ 73
Alarm When In STAY Mode .............................. 73
Any Areas Armed.................................................. 75
Any Areas Disarmed............................................. 75
Area 1 Codepad Data Terminal .......................... 75
Area 1 Has Zone Unsealed................................... 75
Area 1 In Alarm..................................................... 75
Area 1 Is Armed..................................................... 75
Area 1 Is Disarmed................................................ 75
Area 2 Codepad Data Terminal .......................... 75
Area 2 Has Zone Unsealed................................... 75
Area 2 In Alarm..................................................... 75
Area 2 Is Armed..................................................... 75
Area 2 Is Disarmed................................................ 75
Armed In AWAY Mode....................................... 71
Armed In STAY Mode......................................... 71
Auto Arm Pre-Alert Time..................................... 71
AUX Power Supply Fail ....................................... 72
Codepad Duress Alarm......................................... 73
Codepad Fire Alarm.............................................. 73
Codepad Medical Alarm ...................................... 73
Codepad Panic Alarm........................................... 73
Codepad Tamper................................................... 73
Communications Failure....................................... 74
Communications Failure After 3 Unsuccessful Calls
.............................................................................. 74
Outputs
Day Alarm Enabled............................................... 72
Day Alarm Latching.............................................. 72
Day Alarm Resetting............................................. 72
Dialer Active........................................................... 74
Dialer Disabled....................................................... 74
EDMSAT - Satellite Siren..................................... 71
Entry Warning........................................................ 71
Entry Warning + Day Alarm Resetting.............. 72
Exit Warning .......................................................... 71
Exit Warning Finished .......................................... 71
One Shot Polarities ................................................77
Pulsing Polarities.....................................................77
Redirecting Output To Codepad Buzzer............71
Turning On/Off......................................................30
P
Panic Alarm ................................................................... 16
Partitioning
Master Partitioned Codepad Operations............84
User Code Allocations...........................................86
Zone Allocations.....................................................85
Partitioning Options 1
Exit Warning With All Zones Sealed Or Entry
Warning............................................................... 71
First To Open/Last To Close Reporting.............85
Main Codepad To Display Data Only For Area 185
Partitioning Options 2
Fire Alarm Latching .............................................. 73
Fire Alarm Resetting.............................................. 73
Fire Alarm Verification......................................... 74
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | Index
EN | 116
Enable "User Code + 0 + AWAY" To Arm/Disarm
Both Areas........................................................... 85
Arming In AWAY Mode......................................14
Arming In STAY Mode 1.....................................14
Arming In STAY Mode 2.....................................15
Disarming From AWAY Mode............................14
System Options 1
Lock Area 1 To Receiver 1 & Lock Area 2 To
Receiver 2............................................................ 85
Power Up Disarmed......................................................82
Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1.............49
Programming..................................................................34
Automatic Stepping Of Locations ....................... 38
Entry/Exit Tiemrs.................................................. 78
Option Bits.............................. 36, 41, 52, 56, 61, 63
Via Programming Key .......................................... 35
Via Remote Codepad............................................ 34
Programming Key................................................... 35, 91
Test........................................................................... 36
EDM Smart Lockout..............................................80
System Options 2
Access Denied To Be Silent..................................81
Codepad Fire To Be Silent ...................................81
Codepad Medical To Be Silent............................81
Codepad Panic To Be Silent.................................81
System Options 3
AC Fail In 1 Hour..................................................81
Ignore AC Mains Fail Indication.........................82
System Options 4
Q
Enable Control Panel To Power Up Disarmed .82
Quick Start........................................................................9
T
R
Telco Arming Sequence...................................24, 29, 50
Telephone Anti-Jamming............................................. 99
Telephone Monitor Mode ........................................... 25
Test Reports................................................................... 34
Only When Armed..........................................82, 99
TF008 Plug Pack ........................................................... 91
Trouble Reports ............................................................ 65
Receiver 1
Primary Telephone Number ................................ 49
Subscriber ID Number.......................................... 50
Remote Radio Transmitter Codes
Deleting Transmitter Codes ................................. 28
Remote Radio Transmitter Operations......................20
Add or Changing Transmitter Codes ................. 21
Deleting Transmitter Codes ................................. 22
Remote Radio User Codes
U
User Codes..................................................................... 54
Adding Or Changing.......................................27, 28
Allocations When Partitioning .............................86
Deleting..............................................................27, 28
Adding Or Changing.......................................21, 28
Deleting.............................................................22, 28
Reporting Format
Domestic Dialing.................................................... 42
Reset Control Panel Back To Factory Default...........37
RF Zones
Add .......................................................................... 22
Delete....................................................................... 23
W
Walk Test Mode............................................................ 31
Warranty Statement.................................................... 100
Wireless Zones
Add...........................................................................22
Delete.......................................................................23
S
Sensor Watch........................................................... 18, 62
Smart Watch...................................................................80
STAY Indicator....................................................... 10, 11
STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm Status.........83
STAY Mode 1
Arming...............................................................14, 32
STAY Mode 2
Z
Zone
Allocations...............................................................85
EOL Resistor Value...............................................56
Indicators.................................................................12
Isolating Allowed....................................................63
Options 1.................................................................58
Pulse Count.............................................................61
Pulse Count Handover ..........................................61
Arming...............................................................15, 32
Setting Zones ....................................................25, 30
Strobe Test......................................................................33
System Disarmed...........................................................12
System Operations
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICP-CC488 | Installation Guide | Index
EN | 117
Restore Code.......................................................... 66
Restore Report ....................................................... 64
Trouble.................................................................... 65
Zone Bypass....................................................................65
Zone Indicators..............................................................11
Zone Options 1
Lockout Siren & Dialer ......................................... 61
Sensor Watch.......................................................... 62
Zone Options 2
Zone Isolation Allowed .........................................63
Zone Restore Report..............................................64
Zone Reporting Information
Zone Restore Code ................................................66
Zone Types
Chime Zone ............................................................61
Delay-1 Zone...........................................................60
Delay-2 Zone...........................................................60
Handover Zone.......................................................60
Instant Zone ............................................................60
Isolate In STAY Mode 1....................................... 63
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
130 Perinton Parkway
Fairport, NY 14450-9199 USA
www.boschsecurity.com
© 2008 Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
F01U089457-02
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|